Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Installation Manual Ultima 862-880... · This page has been included...

Solution Ultima 844/862/880Installation Manual

ISSUE 1.20

This page has been included for you to cut out and insert into thespine

of the folder

MA48XI

Solution

Ultima

844

/862

/880

Installation

Manual

(61-2) 9672 1233

ISSUE 1.20

Solution Ultima 844/862/880Installation Manual

Copyright 1998 by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited,

SYDNEY, AUSTRALIA

Document Part Number MA48XI

DOCUMENT ISSUE 1.20

Printed 16 February 1999

This documentation is provided to suit Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Control Panel(CC484/CC486/CC488)

Firmware Revision 1.00

Hardware Revision A - J

Alarm Link required = 2.72 or higher

Control Panel Software Version 1.00 = S844_V10

= S862_V10

= S880_V10

Copyright Notice

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, sent or stored in a retrieval system in any form or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ElectronicsDesign and Manufacturing Pty Limited.

Trademarks

Throughout this document trademark names may have been used. Rather than put a trademark symbol in every occurrenceof a trademark name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademarkowner with no intention of infringement of the trademark.

Notice of Liability

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, neither Electronics Design and ManufacturingPty Limited nor any of its official representatives shall have any liability to any person or entity with respect to anyliability, loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this book.

Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited reserves the right to make changes to features and specifications at anytime without prior notification in the interest of ongoing product development and improvement.

Table Of Contents

Introduction______________________________________________________________________17

Introduction __________________________________________________________________________ 18

Solution Ultima 844 Features ____________________________________________________________ 19



Quick Start___________________________________________________________________________ 22Solution Ultima 844 Zone Defaults ________________________________________________________________24Solution Ultima 862 Zone Defaults ________________________________________________________________24Solution Ultima 880 Zone Defaults ________________________________________________________________24Zone Types___________________________________________________________________________________25

Codepad Indicators ________________________________________________________________27

CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad __________________________________________________________ 28Zone Indicators _______________________________________________________________________________28AWAY Indicator ______________________________________________________________________________28STAY Indicator _______________________________________________________________________________29MAINS Indicator ______________________________________________________________________________29FAULT Indicator ______________________________________________________________________________29Audible Indicators _____________________________________________________________________________30

CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad __________________________________________________________ 31Zone Indicators _______________________________________________________________________________31AWAY Indicator ______________________________________________________________________________31STAY Indicator _______________________________________________________________________________32System Disarmed ______________________________________________________________________________32MAINS Indicator ______________________________________________________________________________32FAULT Indicator ______________________________________________________________________________33Programming Mode ____________________________________________________________________________33Off Indicator/Zone Sealed _______________________________________________________________________33On Indicator/Zone In Alarm _____________________________________________________________________33Audible Indicators _____________________________________________________________________________34

CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad____________________________________________________ 35Zone Indicators _______________________________________________________________________________35Area On/Off Indicators _________________________________________________________________________35Area Display Indicators _________________________________________________________________________36Status Indicators_______________________________________________________________________________36

PARTIAL Indicator __________________________________________________________________________36AUX Indicator ______________________________________________________________________________36MAINS Indicator ____________________________________________________________________________37FAULT Indicator ____________________________________________________________________________37Audible Indicators ___________________________________________________________________________37

System Operations_________________________________________________________________39

System Operations_____________________________________________________________________ 40Arming The System In AWAY Mode ______________________________________________________________40

Forced Arming______________________________________________________________________________40Disarming The System From AWAY Mode _________________________________________________________41Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 _____________________________________________________________42

Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode_____________________________________________________________42Forced Arming______________________________________________________________________________43

Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1_________________________________________________________44Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 _____________________________________________________________45

Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode_____________________________________________________________45Forced Arming______________________________________________________________________________45

Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2_________________________________________________________46Codepad Duress Alarm _________________________________________________________________________47Codepad Panic Alarm __________________________________________________________________________47Codepad Fire Alarm____________________________________________________________________________47

Codepad Medical Alarm ________________________________________________________________________47

Isolating Zones ________________________________________________________________________48Standard Isolating ___________________________________________________________________________49Code To Isolate _____________________________________________________________________________50

Fault Analysis Mode____________________________________________________________________51

Fault Descriptions______________________________________________________________________53System Fault _________________________________________________________________________________53

Low Battery________________________________________________________________________________53Date and Time ______________________________________________________________________________53RF Receiver Fail ____________________________________________________________________________53Horn Speaker_______________________________________________________________________________53Telephone Line Fail__________________________________________________________________________53E2 Fault ___________________________________________________________________________________53Fuse Fail __________________________________________________________________________________53

RF Low Battery _______________________________________________________________________________53Tamper Fail __________________________________________________________________________________54Sensor Watch Fault ____________________________________________________________________________54RF Sensor Watch Fault _________________________________________________________________________54Communication Fail ___________________________________________________________________________54

AC Mains Failure ___________________________________________________________________________54

Remote Radio Transmitter Operations ________________________________________________ 55

Remote Radio Transmitter Operations ____________________________________________________56Indications Upon Remote Radio Transmitter Operations _______________________________________________57Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels ___________________________________________________________57Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes_____________________________________________________58

System Functions_________________________________________________________________ 61

System Functions ______________________________________________________________________62Installer Code Functions ________________________________________________________________________62

Adding Or Deleting RF Wireless Devices_________________________________________________________63Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report _______________________________________________65Changing Domestic Phone Numbers_____________________________________________________________66Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence ____________________________________________________________68Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones __________________________________________________________________71Satellite Siren Service Mode ___________________________________________________________________72Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On/Off ________________________________________________________73Walk Test Mode ____________________________________________________________________________74Event Memory Recall Mode ___________________________________________________________________75

Master Code Functions _________________________________________________________________76Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time ____________________________________________________76Changing and Deleting User Codes______________________________________________________________77Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User Codes__________________________________________________79Changing Domestic Phone Numbers_____________________________________________________________81Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence ____________________________________________________________83Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones __________________________________________________________________86Turning Outputs On/Off ______________________________________________________________________87Setting The Date and Time ____________________________________________________________________89Walk Test Mode ____________________________________________________________________________90Event Memory Recall Mode ___________________________________________________________________91

User Code Functions ___________________________________________________________________92Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time ____________________________________________________92

Hold Down Functions___________________________________________________________________93Arm The System In AWAY Mode ______________________________________________________________93Arm The System In STAY Mode 1______________________________________________________________93Arm The System In STAY Mode 2______________________________________________________________94Horn Speaker Test ___________________________________________________________________________94Bell Test __________________________________________________________________________________94Strobe Test_________________________________________________________________________________94Turning Day Alarm On and Off ________________________________________________________________95Fault Analysis Mode _________________________________________________________________________95

Initiate A Modem Call ________________________________________________________________________96Reset Latching Outputs _______________________________________________________________________96Codepad Buzzer Tone Change__________________________________________________________________97Send Test Report ____________________________________________________________________________97

Remote System____________________________________________________________________99

Operations Via Telephone __________________________________________________________99

Remote Arming Via The Telephone _____________________________________________________ 100

Programming ___________________________________________________________________101

Programming ________________________________________________________________________ 102

Programming With The Remote Codepad ________________________________________________ 103

Programming With The Hand Held Programmer__________________________________________ 105

Programming With The Programming Key_______________________________________________ 106

Programming Option Bits _____________________________________________________________ 107

Installer’s Programming Commands ____________________________________________________ 107Command 958 - Enable/Disable Zone Status Mode __________________________________________________108Command 959 - Test Programming Key ___________________________________________________________109Command 960 - Exit Installer's Programming Mode__________________________________________________110Command 961- Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings ___________________________________110Command 962 - Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key_____________________________________111Command 963 - Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel _______________________________________112Command 964 - Erase Programming Key __________________________________________________________113Command 965 - Set Up Domestic Dialling Format___________________________________________________114Command 966 - Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations ______________________________________115Command 999 - Display Panel Type Or Software Version Number ______________________________________117Disable Factory Default________________________________________________________________________118Defaulting The Control Panel ___________________________________________________________________119

Alarm Link Operations ____________________________________________________________121

Alarm Link Software _________________________________________________________________ 122Remote Connect______________________________________________________________________________122

Remote Connect With Customer Control ________________________________________________________122Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification __________________________________________________123Remote Connect With Call Back Verification_____________________________________________________123Direct Connect _____________________________________________________________________________123

Alarm Link Options___________________________________________________________________________124Enable Upload/Download Via Alarm Link _______________________________________________________124Enable Alarm Link Call Back _________________________________________________________________124Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm_____________________________________________________124Use External Modem Module (CC811) For Alarm Link Operations____________________________________124

Domestic Dialling ________________________________________________________________125

Domestic Dialling Format______________________________________________________________ 126Domestic Dialling Function_____________________________________________________________________126

Acknowledge Domestic Dialling_______________________________________________________________126Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting ___________________________________________________127

Disable Domestic Dialling____________________________________________________________________128

Dialler Reporting Formats _________________________________________________________129

Transmission Formats_________________________________________________________________ 130Contact ID Format ____________________________________________________________________________130Point ID Codes_______________________________________________________________________________1314+2 Reporting Format _________________________________________________________________________133Basic Pager Reporting Format___________________________________________________________________134

Basic Pager Display Information ________________________________________________________ 135Subscriber ID Number _________________________________________________________________________135Zone Status _________________________________________________________________________________135System Status________________________________________________________________________________135

Dialler Information ______________________________________________________________ 137

Dialler Information____________________________________________________________________138Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 ________________________________________________________139Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 ______________________________________________________139Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 _________________________________________________________________140Transmission Format For Receiver 1 _____________________________________________________________141Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 ____________________________________________________________141Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 ________________________________________________________142Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 ______________________________________________________142Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 _________________________________________________________________143Transmission Format For Receiver 2 _____________________________________________________________144Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 ____________________________________________________________144Dialling Format ______________________________________________________________________________145Reserved ___________________________________________________________________________________145Telco Arming Sequence _______________________________________________________________________146

Telco Arming – Call Forward Immediate On _____________________________________________________146Telco Arming – Call Forward No Answer On ____________________________________________________146

Telco Disarming Sequence _____________________________________________________________________147Telco Arming – Call Forward Immediate Off _____________________________________________________147Telco Arming – Call Forward No Answer Off ____________________________________________________147

Call Back Telephone Number ___________________________________________________________________147Ring Count _________________________________________________________________________________148Answering Machine Bypass ____________________________________________________________________148Telephone Line Fault Options___________________________________________________________________149

Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails__________________________________________149Sound Speaker, Bell and Strobe When The System Is Armed ________________________________________149Sound Speaker, Bell and Strobe When The System Is Disarmed ______________________________________149Reserved _________________________________________________________________________________149

Dialler Options__________________________________________________________________ 151

Programming Option Bits ______________________________________________________________152Dialler Options 1 _____________________________________________________________________________153

Enabled = Allow Dialler Reporting Functions ____________________________________________________153Disabled = Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions________________________________________________153Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone ______________________________________________________153Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed_____________________________________________153Enabled = Use Bell 103 For FSK Format / Disabled = CCITT V21 Format______________________________153

Dialler Options 2 _____________________________________________________________________________154Send Open/Close Reports Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred____________________________________154Send Open/Close Reports When In STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 _________________________________154Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete _______________________________________________________154Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 - 55 Seconds_________________________________________154

Dialler Options 3 _____________________________________________________________________________155Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit/Second ____________________________________________________155Reserved _________________________________________________________________________________155Change Decadic Dialling To 60/40 _____________________________________________________________155Reserved _________________________________________________________________________________155

Alarm Link Options___________________________________________________________________________156Enable Upload/Download Via Alarm Link _______________________________________________________156Enable Alarm Link Call Back _________________________________________________________________156Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm_____________________________________________________156Use External Modem Module (CC811) For Alarm Link Operations ___________________________________156

User Codes _____________________________________________________________________ 157

Access Codes _________________________________________________________________________158Installer Code _______________________________________________________________________________158User Codes _________________________________________________________________________________159Solution Ultima 844/862 User Codes _____________________________________________________________160Solution Ultima 880 User Codes _________________________________________________________________160User Code Priority____________________________________________________________________________161

Arm and Disarm ___________________________________________________________________________161Arm Only_________________________________________________________________________________161Arm and Disarm + Open/Close Reports _________________________________________________________161Arm Only + Closing Reports__________________________________________________________________161

Arm and Disarm + Code To Isolate_____________________________________________________________162Arm and Disarm + Code To Isolate + Open/Close Reports___________________________________________162Arm and Disarm + Master Code Functions _______________________________________________________162Arm and Disarm + Master Code Functions + Open/Close Reports _____________________________________162Arm and Disarm + Master Code Functions + Code To Isolate ________________________________________162Arm and Disarm + Master Code Functions + Code To Isolate + Open/Close Reports ______________________162

Zone Information ________________________________________________________________163Day Alarm Zones_____________________________________________________________________________164

Day Alarm Resetting ________________________________________________________________________164Day Alarm Latching ________________________________________________________________________164

Day Alarm Operation__________________________________________________________________________165EOL Resistor Value___________________________________________________________________________166Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N/C Contacts______________________________________________167Connections Of Split EOL Resistors With Tamper Circuit _____________________________________________167Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N/O Contacts _____________________________________________168

Zone Programming ___________________________________________________________________ 169Zone Operating Information ____________________________________________________________________169Zone Options ________________________________________________________________________________169Zone Reporting Information ____________________________________________________________________169Solution Ultima 844 Zones Defaults ______________________________________________________________170Solution Ultima 862 Zones Defaults ______________________________________________________________170Solution Ultima 880 Zones Defaults ______________________________________________________________170Zone Types__________________________________________________________________________________171

Instant Zone _______________________________________________________________________________171Handover Zone_____________________________________________________________________________171Delay-1 Zone ______________________________________________________________________________171Delay-2 Zone ______________________________________________________________________________171Reserved__________________________________________________________________________________171Reserved__________________________________________________________________________________17224 Hour Medical ___________________________________________________________________________17224 Hour Panic _____________________________________________________________________________17224 Hour Hold-Up ___________________________________________________________________________17224 Hour Tamper____________________________________________________________________________172Reserved__________________________________________________________________________________172Keyswitch Zone ____________________________________________________________________________17224 Hour Burglary Zone ______________________________________________________________________17224 Hour Fire Zone __________________________________________________________________________172Chime Zone _______________________________________________________________________________173Zone Not Used _____________________________________________________________________________173

Zone Pulse Count_____________________________________________________________________________173Zone Pulse Count Handover __________________________________________________________________173

Zone Pulse Count Time ________________________________________________________________________174Zone Options 1_______________________________________________________________________________175

Lockout Siren & Lockout Dialler ______________________________________________________________175Delay Alarm Reporting ______________________________________________________________________175Silent Alarm_______________________________________________________________________________176Sensor Watch______________________________________________________________________________176

Keyswitch Zone Options _______________________________________________________________________177Latching Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode ______________________________________________________177Latching Arm In AWAY Mode ________________________________________________________________177Latching Disarm From AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 _______________________________177Latching Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1______________________________________________________177Latching Arm In STAY Mode 1 _______________________________________________________________177Latching Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2____________________________________________177Momentary Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode ____________________________________________________178Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode______________________________________________________________178Momentary Disarm From AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 _____________________________178Momentary Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1 ___________________________________________________178Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1 _____________________________________________________________178Momentary Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 _________________________________________178

Zone Options 2_______________________________________________________________________________179Isolate In STAY Mode 1 _____________________________________________________________________179Zone Isolation Allowed ______________________________________________________________________179Forced Arming Allowed _____________________________________________________________________179

Zone Restore Report ________________________________________________________________________179Zone Reporting Information ____________________________________________________________________180

Zone Report Code __________________________________________________________________________180Zone Dialler Options ________________________________________________________________________180

Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren ______________________________________________________________181Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler _____________________________________________________________182

System Reporting Information _____________________________________________________ 183

Reporting Information _________________________________________________________________184Zone Status – Zone Tamper Report_______________________________________________________________184Zone Status – Walk Test Report _________________________________________________________________184Zone Status – Bypass Reports ___________________________________________________________________185Zone Status – Trouble Reports __________________________________________________________________185Zone Status – Sensor Watch Reports______________________________________________________________186Zone Status – Alarm Restore Code _______________________________________________________________186Zone Status Reporting Options __________________________________________________________________186RF Supervision Time__________________________________________________________________________187RF Low Battery Report ________________________________________________________________________187RF Receiver Trouble Report ____________________________________________________________________188RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report _____________________________________________________________188RF Dialler Options ___________________________________________________________________________188Open/Close Reports___________________________________________________________________________189Open/Close Reporting Options __________________________________________________________________189Codepad Duress Report________________________________________________________________________190Codepad Panic Report _________________________________________________________________________190Codepad Fire Report __________________________________________________________________________191Codepad Medical Report_______________________________________________________________________191Codepad Reporting Options ____________________________________________________________________192System Status – Fuse Fail Report ________________________________________________________________192System Status – Fuse Fail Restore Report__________________________________________________________192System Status – AC Fail Report _________________________________________________________________193System Status – AC Fail Restore Report___________________________________________________________193System Status - Low Battery Report ______________________________________________________________194System Status - Low Battery Restore Report _______________________________________________________194System Status - Access Denied __________________________________________________________________195

Code Retries ______________________________________________________________________________195System Status Reporting Options ________________________________________________________________196Test Reporting Time __________________________________________________________________________197Test Reporting Dialler Options __________________________________________________________________197

Programmable Outputs ___________________________________________________________ 199

Outputs _____________________________________________________________________________200Output Defaults ______________________________________________________________________________200Default For Strobe ____________________________________________________________________________200Default For Entry/Exit_________________________________________________________________________200Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer_______________________________________________________201Output Event Types___________________________________________________________________________202Output Polarity ______________________________________________________________________________211

Output Not Used ___________________________________________________________________________211Normally Open, Going Low __________________________________________________________________211Normally Open, Pulsing Low _________________________________________________________________211Normally Open, One Shot Low ________________________________________________________________211Normally Open, One Shot Low With Retrigger ___________________________________________________211Normally Open, One Shot Low With Reset ______________________________________________________211Normally Open, One Shot Low With Alarm______________________________________________________212Normally Open, Latching Low ________________________________________________________________212Normally Low, Going Open __________________________________________________________________212Normally Low, Pulsing Open _________________________________________________________________212Normally Low, One Shot Open________________________________________________________________212Normally Low, One Shot Open With Retrigger ___________________________________________________212Normally Low, One Shot Open With Reset ______________________________________________________212Normally Low, One Shot Open With Alarm______________________________________________________212Normally Low, Latching Open ________________________________________________________________212

Timing Of Outputs ___________________________________________________________________________213Pulsing Polarities_____________________________________________________________________________213

One Shot Polarities ___________________________________________________________________________214

System Event Timers______________________________________________________________215

System Event Timers__________________________________________________________________ 216Programming Entry/Exit Timers _________________________________________________________________216Entry Timer 1________________________________________________________________________________216Entry Timer 2________________________________________________________________________________216Exit Time ___________________________________________________________________________________217Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode______________________________________________________________217Delay Alarm Reporting Time ___________________________________________________________________217Sensor Watch Time ___________________________________________________________________________218Codepad Lockout Time ________________________________________________________________________218Siren Run Time ______________________________________________________________________________219Siren Sound Rate _____________________________________________________________________________219Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer ___________________________________________________________________220Auto Arming Time____________________________________________________________________________220Auto Disarming Time _________________________________________________________________________221Kiss-Off Wait Time ___________________________________________________________________________221Speaker Beep Volume _________________________________________________________________________221System Time ________________________________________________________________________________222System Date_________________________________________________________________________________223

Setting The Date and Time ___________________________________________________________________223

System and Consumer Options______________________________________________________225

Programming Option Bits _____________________________________________________________ 226System Options 1_____________________________________________________________________________227

Enable EDM Smart Lockout __________________________________________________________________227Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker____________________________________________________________227Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm/Disarm __________________________________________________227Assign Button 4 On Transmitter To Arm STAY Mode 1 ____________________________________________227

System Options 2_____________________________________________________________________________228Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent ____________________________________________________________228Enable Codepad Fire To Be Silent______________________________________________________________228Enable Codepad Medical To Be Silent __________________________________________________________228Enable Access Denied To Be Silent ____________________________________________________________228

System Options 3_____________________________________________________________________________229Enable AC Fail In 1 Hour ____________________________________________________________________229Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication _______________________________________________________________229Enable Zone Pulse Count Handover ____________________________________________________________229Enable Handover Delay To Be Sequential________________________________________________________229

System Options 4_____________________________________________________________________________230Enable Control Panel To Power Up In The Disarmed State __________________________________________230Enable Arm/Disarm Tracking On Power Up ______________________________________________________230Enable Internal Crystal To Keep Time __________________________________________________________230Enable Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface / Night Arm Station Or RE005 _________________________________230

Consumer Options 1 __________________________________________________________________________231Send Test Reports Only If The System Is Armed __________________________________________________231Enable - Send Test Report After Siren Reset______________________________________________________231Enable Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 ____________________________________________________________231Enable The STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status __________________________________________231

Consumer Options 2 __________________________________________________________________________232Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode______________________________________________________________232Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 _______________________232Enable Single Button Disarming From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 _______________________________232Enable Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm ________________________________________________________232

Consumer Options 3 __________________________________________________________________________233Enable Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps ____________________________________________________________233Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 ________________________________________________233Enable Operation Of Siren & Strobe In STAY Mode 1 & STAY Mode 2 _______________________________233Enable Zone Tamper Alarms To Be Silent _______________________________________________________233

Radio Input Options___________________________________________________________________________234DS304 Mhz Receiver (RF3212) _______________________________________________________________234Latching Keyswitch Input ____________________________________________________________________234Momentary Keyswitch Input __________________________________________________________________234

Partitioning ____________________________________________________________________ 235

CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad ___________________________________________________236Zone Indicators ______________________________________________________________________________236Area On/Off Indicators ________________________________________________________________________237Area Display Indicators________________________________________________________________________237Status Indicators _____________________________________________________________________________237

PARTIAL Indicator_________________________________________________________________________237AUX Indicator_____________________________________________________________________________238MAINS Indicator___________________________________________________________________________238FAULT Indicator___________________________________________________________________________238Audible Indicators __________________________________________________________________________239

Operating Codepads In Partitioning _____________________________________________________240Operating From A CP5 Area Addressable LED Codepad____________________________________________240Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad _______________________________________________240

Programming ________________________________________________________________________241Partitioning Options 1 _________________________________________________________________________241

Enable First To Open/Last To Close Reporting ___________________________________________________241Enable Main Codepad To Display Data Only For Area 1____________________________________________241Allow Resetting Of Sirens From Either Area _____________________________________________________242Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When Using Telephone Line ______________________________242

Partitioning Options 2 _________________________________________________________________________242Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2__________________________________________242Enable “User Code + 0 + AWAY” To Arm/Disarm Both Areas ______________________________________242Reserved _________________________________________________________________________________242Reserved _________________________________________________________________________________242

Zone Allocations ______________________________________________________________________243Zone Allocations For Area 1 ____________________________________________________________________243Zone Allocations For Area 2 ____________________________________________________________________243

User Code Allocations _________________________________________________________________245

Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning ____________________________________246Setting Up The Master Partitioned Codepad As The Main Codepad.___________________________________246Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad As The Main Codepad _____________________________________________246Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad ________________________________________________________________246Setting Up An Area 2 Codepad ________________________________________________________________246

Codepad Connections For Partitioning - Examples _________________________________________247

RF Information _________________________________________________________________ 249RF Option Bit _______________________________________________________________________________250

Sound Siren On RF Receiver Fail ______________________________________________________________250Sound Siren On RF Receiver Tamper / Jamming __________________________________________________250Unseal Zone That Fails Supervision ____________________________________________________________250Enable RF Jamming Monitoring _______________________________________________________________250

RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 – 8)______________________________________________________________250RF Device Mapping (Devices 9 – 16)_____________________________________________________________250RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 1 – 8 Read Only)________________________________________________251RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 9 – 16 Read Only)_______________________________________________251

Optional Equipment______________________________________________________________ 253

Optional Equipment___________________________________________________________________254

Terminals and Descriptions________________________________________________________ 257

Terminal Definitions and Descriptions____________________________________________________258

Glossary Of Terms ____________________________________________________________________259

Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Wiring Diagram______________________________________________262

Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Component Overlay __________________________________________263

Telecom Connection Diagrams __________________________________________________________264

Appendices _____________________________________________________________________ 265

Appendix A _________________________________________________________________________ 266Telephone Anti-Jamming_______________________________________________________________________266

Appendix B__________________________________________________________________________ 267Test Reports Only When Armed _________________________________________________________________267

Specifications____________________________________________________________________269

Warranty Statement __________________________________________________________________ 270

Year 2000 Compliance ________________________________________________________________ 270

Specifications ________________________________________________________________________ 271Software Version Number ______________________________________________________________________271Advice To Users _____________________________________________________________________________271New Zealand Telepermit Notes __________________________________________________________________272

Solution Ultima 844 ______________________________________________________________273

Programming Sheets______________________________________________________________273

Solution Ultima 862 ______________________________________________________________283


Solution Ultima 880 ______________________________________________________________293


Index __________________________________________________________________________303

Introduction

This section includes the following;

• Introduction

• Solution Ultima 844 Features



• Quick Start

• Solution Ultima 844 Zones Defaults

• Solution Ultima 862 Zone Defaults

• Solution Ultima 880 Zone Defaults

• Zone Types

IntroductionCongratulations on selecting the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel for yourinstallation. So that you can obtain the most from your unit, we suggest that you take the time to readthrough this manual and familiarise yourself with the numerous outstanding operating and installationfeatures of this system.

You will notice that in all aspects of planning, engineering, styling, operation, convenience andadaptability, we have sought to anticipate your every possible requirement. Programming simplicityand speed have been some of the major considerations and we believe that our objectives in this areahave been more than satisfied.

This installation manual will explain all aspects of programming the Solution Ultima844/862/880 control panel from factory default to final commissioning. All system parametersand options are detailed, however, suitability is left up to the individual. Every control panel can betailored to meet all requirements quickly and easily. The programming simplicity will make yourinstallation quick, accurate and rewarding each and every time.

The Solution range of control panels are very popular amongst thousands of people throughoutmany countries of the world, all who have various levels of technical aptitude and ability. We havetried to aim this installation manual to all levels of readers.

As the Solution control panels continue to be improved over the years, they have become verypowerful. Some of its early first-time users have advanced to true "power users" and we need toaddress their needs too, while maintaining the simplicity of the manual and the product.

18 Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Installation Manual

ISSUE120.DOC Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited

Solution Ultima 844 FeaturesThe Solution Ultima 844 security system uses the very latest in microprocessor technology toprovide you with more useful features and superior reliability and performance.

Following is a list of the main features that the control panel will provide.

Ø Eight Programmable User Codes (1 – 8)

Ø Eight Remote Radio User Codes (9 – 16)

Ø Four Programmable Hard Wired Or Wireless Burglary Zones

Ø Four 24 Hour Programmable Hard Wired Or Wireless Zones

Ø Dual Reporting

Ø On-Board Line Fault Module

Ø Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence

Ø Automatic Arming

Ø Automatic Disarming

Ø Codepad Duress, Panic, Fire, Medical, Access Denied Alarms

Ø STAY Mode and AWAY Mode Operation

Ø Upload/Download Programmable

Ø Dynamic Battery Testing

Ø Entry and Exit Warning Beeper

Ø Remote Arming

Ø Answering Machine Bypass

Ø AC Fail and System Fault Indicators

Ø Monitored Siren Output

Ø Strobe Output

Ø Relay Output

Ø Separate Fire Alarm Sound

Ø EDMSAT – Satellite Siren Compatible

Ø Zone Lockout

Ø Sensor Watch

Ø Day Alarm

Ø Event Memory Recall

Ø Walk Test Mode

Ø Delayed Reporting

Introduction 19

Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE120.DOC




Ø Eight Remote Radio User Codes (9 – 16)

Ø Six Programmable Hard Wired Or Wireless Burglary Zones

Ø Two 24 Hour Programmable Hard Wired Or Wireless Zones

Ø Dual Reporting


Ø Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence

Ø Automatic Arming







Ø Remote Arming




Ø Strobe Output

Ø Relay Output



Ø Zone Lockout

Ø Sensor Watch

Ø Day Alarm


Ø Walk Test Mode







Ø Eight Variable User Codes (Radio Remote/Programmable User Codes (9 - 16))

Ø Eight Programmable Hard Wired Or Wireless Burglary Zones

Ø Partitionable To Two Separate Areas

Ø Dual Reporting


Ø Telco Arming/Disarming Sequence

Ø Automatic Arming







Ø Remote Arming




Ø Strobe Output

Ø Relay Output



Ø Zone Lockout

Ø Sensor Watch

Ø Day Alarm


Ø Walk Test Mode


Introduction 21


Quick StartThe following steps will allow you to use the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panelwith the factory default values. The default values allow the control panel to communicate in the

Contact ID format. If you are not familiar to programming the Solution range of control panels, wesuggest that you first read information contained in the programming section beginning on page 102.

1. After all wiring has been completed, connect the AC plug pack to the control panel.Both the MAINS and AWAY indicators will illuminate. The MAINS indicator will display toindicate that the AC mains supply has been connected. The AWAY indicator displays that thesystem is now armed in the AWAY Mode. If any 24-hour zones are unsealed at the time thesystem is powered up, the siren, strobe and bell outputs will activate into alarm and thecorresponding zone indicator will flash.

2. Enter the default Master Code 2580 followed by the button to disarm the systemand to reset any alarm that may have occurred during the system power up. The AWAYindicator will extinguish to indicate that the system has now been disarmed. If any zoneindicators are flashing, this would indicate that an alarm had occurred on that zone. If a zoneindicator is constantly illuminated, this would indicate that the zone is unsealed.

3. The back-up battery should now be connected.

4. Enter the factory default Installer Code 1234 followed by the button. Two beepswill be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will now flash simultaneously to indicate thatyou have now entered Installer’s Programming Mode. When entering Installer’s ProgrammingMode, you will be automatically positioned at “LOCATION 000”, the beginning of thePrimary Telephone Number For Receiver 1.

5. Enter the Primary Telephone Number followed by the Secondary Telephone Number and the

Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1. Refer to Dialler Information on page 138 for moreinformation.

Remember that when programming a zero in the telephone numbers of Receiver 1 andReceiver 2, a zero must be programmed as a ten. Programming a zero in the telephone numberwill indicate the end of the dialling sequence. A zero must be programmed as a zero in alllocations other than the telephone numbers for Receiver 1, Receiver 2 and the Call BackTelephone number, unless otherwise stated.

6. Set the time for the test reports if required. Any other programming changes required may also

be made, otherwise the factory default settings will be used. Refer to Test Reporting Time onpage 197 for more information on programming test reports.

7. Enter Installer’s Command 960 followed by the button to exit Installer’sProgramming Mode. Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators willextinguish. The system has now returned to the disarmed state and is now ready for use. Referto Installer’s Programming Commands on page 107 for more information.

8. Use the Master Code to set the date and time. Refer to How To Set The Date and Time on

page 23 for more information.



How To Set The Date and Time

1. Enter your followed by 6 and the button.Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash.

2. Enter the day, month, year, hour and minute using the (DD, MM, YY, HH, MM) format (ie.DD = Day of the month, MM = Month of the year, YY = Current year, HH = Hour of the day,MM = Minute of the day).

Please note that when programming the hour of the day, you will need to use 24:00 hourformat.

3. Press the button when finished.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish. If a long beep isheard, an error was made when entering the date and time.

+ 6 +

+ DD + MM + YY + HH + MM+

ExampleIf the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1997 at 10:30 PM, program the date and time asfollows;

2580 + 6 +

+ 01 + 01 + 97 + 22 + 30+

Introduction 23


Solution Ultima 844 Zone DefaultsThe default zone settings of the control panel are listed in the table below. Zones 1 – 4 may beprogrammed to any of the available zone types. Zones 5 – 8 are limited to that they may only beprogrammed to any 24 hour or keyswitch type. Refer to “Table 4: Available Zone Types” on page 25for the different zone types that may be selected.

Zone No Zone Type Zone No Zone Type

1 Delay-1 5 24 Hour Burglary

2 Handover 6 24 Hour Burglary

3 Handover 7 24 Hour Fire

4 Instant 8 24 Hour Tamper

Table 1: Zone Defaults For Solution Ultima 844

Solution Ultima 862 Zone DefaultsThe default zone settings of the control panel are listed in the table below. Zones 1 – 6 may beprogrammed to any of the available zone types. Zones 7 and 8 are limited to that they may only beprogrammed to any 24 hour or keyswitch type. Refer to “Table 4: Available Zone Types” on page 25for the different zone types that may be selected.


1 Delay-1 5 Instant

2 Handover 6 Instant

3 Handover 7 24 Hour Fire

4 Handover 8 24 Hour Tamper


Solution Ultima 880 Zone DefaultsThe default zone settings of the control panel are listed in the table below. Zones 1 – 8 may beprogrammed to any of the available zone types. Refer to “Table 4: Available Zone Types” on page 25for the different zone types that may be selected.


1 Delay-1 5 Instant







Zone TypesThere are thirteen different zone types to choose from when programming zones. These thirteendifferent zone types are available for all Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panels. Referto Zone Programming on page 169 for more information on programming zones.

Zone Type Description Zone Type Description

0 Instant 8 24 Hour Hold-Up


2 Delay-1 10 Reserved

3 Delay-2 11 Keyswitch

4 Reserved 12 24 Hour Burglary

5 Reserved 13 24 Hour Fire

6 24 Hour Medical 14 Chime Only

7 24 Hour Panic 15 Zone Not Used

Table 4: Available Zone Types

Introduction 25


Codepad Indicators


• CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad

• CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad

• CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad

CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad

The codepad is the communications interface between you and your alarmsystem. The codepad allows you to issue commands and offers both visualand audible indications that guide you through the general operation.

The codepad incorporates numerous indicators. There are ZONE indicatorswhich are used to show the condition of each zone and four others forgeneral status. The following is a list of situations and the relevantindications that will be seen.

Figure 1: CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad(CP508)

Zone IndicatorsThe ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones. The following table lists the variouscircumstances that the indicators will display (ie. Zone Sealed, Zone Unsealed).

Indicator Definition

On Zone Is Unsealed

Off Zone Is Sealed

Flashing Fast(0.25 Sec On – 0.25 Sec Off) Zone Is In Alarm Condition

Flashing Slow(1 Sec On – 1 Sec Off) Zone Is Manually Isolated

Table 5: Zone Indicators

AWAY IndicatorThe AWAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in AWAY Mode. The AWAY indicatorwill also flash in unison with the STAY indicator when Installer’s Programming Mode or Master CodeFunctions are used.

Refer to page 40 for more information on the different methods on arming the system in AWAYMode.


On System Is Armed In AWAY Mode

Off System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode

Table 6: AWAY Indicator



STAY IndicatorThe STAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.The STAY indicator will also flash in unison with the AWAY indicator when Installer’s ProgrammingMode or Master Code Functions are used.

For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1, refer to page 42. Refer to ZoneOptions 2 on page 179 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1.For the method of arming the system in STAY Mode 2, refer to page 45. Refer to Setting STAYMode 2 Zones on page 71 when using the Installer Code or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 86when using the Master Code.


On System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2

Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode

Flashing Zone Isolating Mode Or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones

Once Every 3 Seconds Day Alarm Status On/Off Indicator

Table 7: STAY Indicator

MAINS IndicatorThe MAINS indicator is used to display that the systems AC mains supply is normal or has failed.

When programming numbers (ie. Installer’s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions), theMAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15. The MAINSindicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator (eg: If you program atwelve, the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate).


On AC Mains Power Normal

Flashing AC Mains Failure

Table 8: MAINS Indicator

FAULT IndicatorThe FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a fault. Refer to FaultDescriptions on page 53 for more information on system faults.

Every time a new system fault has been detected (eg: FAULT indicator flashing), the codepad willbegin to beep once every minute.

Pressing the button once will cancel the once a minute beep and acknowledge the fault (eg:FAULT indicator on).


On There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified

Off The System Is Normal, There Are No Faults

Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged

Table 9: FAULT Indicator

Codepad Indicators 29


Audible IndicatorsIn general, the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows:


One Short BeepA Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or EndOf Exit Time When Armed In Either STAY Mode 1 OrSTAY Mode 2

Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code

Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed

One Long BeepIndicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode OrThe Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted

One Short Beep Every SecondWalk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or WarningBefore Automatic Arming Takes Place

One Short Beep Every TwoSeconds Telephone Monitor Mode Is Active

One Short Beep Every Minute There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged

Table 10: Audible Indications



CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad


The codepad incorporates numerous indicators. There are ZONE indicatorswhich are used to show the condition of each zone and seven others forgeneral status. The following is a list of situations and the relevantindications that will be seen.

Figure 2: CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad(CP508L)

Zone Indicators

1 2 3 ....The ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones. The following table lists the variouscircumstances that the indicators will display (ie. Zone Sealed, Zone Unsealed).


On Zone Is Unsealed

Off Zone Is Sealed




AWAY IndicatorThe AWAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in AWAY Mode. The indicatorwill also illuminate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode. The AWAY indicator will also flashin unison with the STAY indicator when Installer’s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions areused.

Refer to page 40 for more information on the different methods on arming the system in AWAYMode.


On System Is Armed In AWAY Mode

Off System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode

Table 12: AWAY Indicator



STAY IndicatorThe STAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.The STAY indicator will also flash in unison with the AWAY indicator when Installer’s ProgrammingMode or Master Code Functions are used.

The indicator will also illuminate when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode2.

For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1, refer to page 42. Refer to ZoneOptions 2 on page 179 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1.For the method of arming the system in STAY Mode 2, refer to page 45. Refer to Setting STAYMode 2 Zones on page 71 when using the Installer Code or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 86when using the Master Code.





Once Every 3 Seconds Day Alarm Status On/Off Indicator

Table 13: STAY Indicator

System Disarmed

This indicator will illuminate with the indicator when the system has been disarmed.


When programming numbers (ie. Installer’s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions), theMAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15. The MAINSindicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator (eg: If you program atwelve, the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate).















Programming Mode

Flashing

These two indicators will flash when the system has entered either Installer’s Programming Mode orwhen any Master Code Functions are used.

Off Indicator/Zone SealedThe indicator will illuminate when the system is in the disarmed state or Installer’sProgramming Mode has been entered and will flash when a zone becomes unsealed during thedisarmed state. The indicator will stop flashing when all zones are sealed.

On Indicator/Zone In AlarmThe indicator will illuminate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode and will flash when analarm occurs. The indicator will reset once a valid user code has been entered.



CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad

Figure 3: CP5 Master Partitioned LEDCodepad (CP500P)

This codepad is only used on the Solution Ultima 880 control panelwhen partitioned. The Master Partitioned LED codepad will allow the userto operate both areas individually from the same codepad, without the needto operate individual areas from separate codepads.



Refer to Partitioning on page 235 for more information.

The indicators on the CP5 Master Partitioned LED codepad are configured in to four groups.Following is a description of what the indicators mean.



On Zone Is Unsealed

Off Zone Is Sealed




Area On/Off IndicatorsThe group of four Area On/Off indicators (1 – 4) show the status of each area (ie. If an indicator isilluminated, that area is armed and if the indicator is not illuminated, that area is disarmed).

If an area is armed in STAY Mode 1, the corresponding Area On/Off indicator will be illuminated inconjunction with the PARTIAL indicator. If the area is armed in AWAY Mode, only thecorresponding Area On/Off Indicator will be illuminated.

Area On/Off Indicator Definition

On Area Is Armed In AWAY Mode Or STAY Mode 1

Off Area Is Disarmed

Table 18: Area On/Off Indicators

1

2



Area Display IndicatorsA group of four Area Display indicators display which area is currently being displayed (ie. If number1 is being displayed, all information provided on the codepad display relates only to Area 1. Ifnumber 2 is being displayed, all information provided on the codepad display relates only to Area 2).

Pressing the button will toggle or move you to the next area display (ie. If Area 1 is currentlybeing displayed, pressing the button will toggle or move you to Area 2. Pressing the button a second time will toggle you back to display information for Area 1).

Area Display Indicators Definition

On Indicates Current Area Being Displayed

Off Indicates Current Area Not Being Displayed

Table 19: Area Display Indicators

Status IndicatorsA group of four indicators display the following:

PARTIAL IndicatorThe PARTIAL indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1. The PARTIALindicator will also flash in unison with the AUX indicator when Installer’s Programming Mode orMaster Code Functions are used.

For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1, refer to page 42. Refer to ZoneOptions 1 on page 169 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1.


On System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1

Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode 1

Table 20: Partial Indicator

AUX IndicatorIf Option 8 in “LOCATION 444” on page 241 has been enabled, the AUX indicator will be used todisplay when the control panel is using the telephone line. The AUX indicator will also flash in unisonwith the PARTIAL indicator when Installer’s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used.





Table 21: AUX Indicator

4

3




When programming numbers (ie Installer’s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions), theMAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15. The MAINSindicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator (eg: If you program atwelve, the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate).

























System Operations


• Arming The System In AWAY Mode

• Disarming The System From AWAY Mode

• Arming The System In STAY Mode 1

• Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1

• Arming The System In STAY Mode 2

• Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2

• Codepad Duress Alarm

• Codepad Panic Alarm

• Codepad Fire Alarm

• Codepad Medical Alarm

• Isolating Zones

• Fault Analysis Mode

System OperationsThis section explains the general operations of the system. The operations will explain how to armand disarm the system in the various modes, how to isolate zones, initiate codepad alarms anddetermine any fault that may occur.

Arming The System In AWAY ModeArming the system in AWAY Mode is normally performed when you leave the premises and requirethat all zones be activated in a ready state to detect any intrusion.

There are two different methods for arming the system in AWAY Mode. Method one is standard andwill always operate. Method two is optional and requires Option 2 in "LOCATION 441" to beenabled on page 232.

If you require to isolate a zone(s) prior to arming the system in AWAY Mode, refer to Isolating Zoneson page 48.

Single button arming in AWAY Mode will report as user code number 16.

Method OneHow To Arm The System In AWAY Mode

1. Enter your followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will illuminate. Exit time will nowcommence.

+

Method TwoHow To Arm The System In AWAY Mode

1. Hold down the button until two beeps are heard.The AWAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence. Refer to Option 2 in"LOCATION 441" on page 232 to enable single button arming in AWAY Mode.

If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time, the zone will be automatically isolated and will beconstantly illuminated on the remote codepad. The zone will again become an active part of thesystem as soon as it has resealed (ie. If a window is left open after exit time has expired, the windowwill not be an active part of the system until it has closed. Opening the window after exit time hasexpired will cause an alarm condition).

Forced ArmingThe feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming. Refer to ZoneOptions 2 on page 179 to enable forced arming for each zone.

If the AWAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the systemin AWAY Mode, forced arming is not permitted. If this is the case, you must ensure that all zones aresealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system.



Disarming The System From AWAY ModeWhen you enter the premises after the system has been armed in AWAY Mode, you will need todisarm the system from AWAY Mode to disable detection devices that will activate the sirens, strobeand bell outputs.

If there has been an alarm condition prior to disarming the system from AWAY Mode, a flashingZONE indicator will be displayed, indicating a previous alarm on that zone.

How To Disarm The System From AWAY Mode

1. Enter your followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will extinguish.

+

System Operations 41


Arming The System In STAY Mode 1Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 is only used when the perimeter and unused areas of thepremises need to be armed to detect any would be intruder from entering the premises, at the sametime allowing you to move freely within an area which has been automatically isolated.

Programming zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 can only be programmed by theinstaller. Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 179 for further information on setting zones to beautomatically isolated in STAY Mode 1.

There are two methods for arming your system in STAY Mode 1. Method one is standard and willalways operate. Method two is optional and requires Option 2 in "LOCATION 441" to be enabled onpage 232.

When reporting back to base, a “Partial Close” report (Contact ID Event Code 456) will be sent.

Entry Guard Timer For STAY ModeWhen arming the system in STAY Mode 1, an optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer ForSTAY Mode may be used to delay the sirens, strobe and bell outputs if a zone that has not beenautomatically isolated has triggered into alarm condition. Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is thedelay time used for all zones except 24 hour zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 orSTAY Mode 2.

If the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed and a zone that has not beenautomatically isolated has triggered, the codepad will beep twice a second until the Entry Guard TimerFor STAY Mode has expired or the system has been disarmed. If the alarm condition has not beenreset before Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode expires, the strobe, bell and siren outputs willactivate into alarm.

Single button arming in STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 16.

Method OneHow To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1

1. Enter your followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will illuminate. Exit time will nowcommence.

Any zones that have been programmed to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 willbegin to flash until exit time expires. At the end of exit time, the ZONE indicators willextinguish and the codepad will give one short beep.

+



Method TwoHow To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1

1. Hold down the button until two beeps are heard.The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence.




If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the systemin STAY Mode 1, forced arming is not permitted. If this is the case, you must ensure that all zonesare sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system.



Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 1. Method one is standard andwill always operate. Method two is optional and needs Option 4 to be enabled in "LOCATION 441"on page 232.

Method One

How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 1

1. Enter your followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish. The system is now disarmed.

+

Method TwoA flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone. If this is the case, a valid usercode will need to be used to disarm the system using method one. To enable method two, Option 4 in"LOCATION 441" on page 232 will need to be enabled.


1. Hold down the button until two beeps are heard.The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system is now disarmed.

Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 16.



Arming The System In STAY Mode 2Arming the system in STAY Mode 2 is only used when the perimeter and unused areas of thepremises need to be armed to detect any would be intruder from entering the premises, at the sametime allowing you to move freely within an area which has been automatically isolated.

Programming zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 can be programmed either by theInstaller Code Function – Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 71 or Master Code Functions -Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 86.

When reporting back to base, a “Partial Close” report (Contact ID Event Code 456) will be sent.

Entry Guard Timer For STAY ModeWhen arming the system in STAY Mode 2, an optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer ForSTAY Mode may be used to delay the sirens, strobe and bell outputs if a zone that has not beenautomatically isolated has triggered into alarm condition. Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is thedelay time used for all zones except 24 hour zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 orSTAY Mode 2.

If the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed and a zone that has not beenautomatically isolated has triggered, the codepad will beep twice a second until the Entry Guard TimerFor STAY Mode has expired or the system has been disarmed. If the alarm condition has not beenreset before Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode expires, the strobe, bell and siren outputs willactivate into alarm.

Single button arming in STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 16.

How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 2

1. Hold down the 0 button until two beeps are heard.The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence.


0



If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the system,forced arming is not permitted. If this is the case, you must ensure that all zones are sealed ormanually isolated before you can arm the system.



Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 2. Method one is standard andwill always operate. Method two is optional and requires Option 4 to be enabled in "LOCATION441" on page 232.

Method One


1. Enter your followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish. The system is now disarmed.

+

Method Two

A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone. If this is the case a valid usercode will need to be used to disarm the system using method one. To enable method two, Option 4 in"LOCATION 441" on page 232 will need to be programmed.


1. Hold down the 0 button until two beeps are heard.The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system is now disarmed.

0

Single button disarming from STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 16.



Codepad Duress Alarm

A codepad duress alarm is used as a silent hold up alarm. This will only occur when the number 9 isadded to the end of any valid user code that is being used to disarm the system. However, if a usercode has a priority level of arming only, entering their user code followed by 9 will still send a duressalarm when the system is armed.

A duress alarm (Contact ID Event Code 121) is only useful if your system is reporting back to amonitoring station or pocket pager as domestic reporting format can’t decipher which type of alarmhad occurred. If you wish to disable the codepad duress alarm report, refer to “LOCATION 348” on

page 190 for more information. If you require to activate a duress alarm by adding a number 3 tothe end of any valid user code being used to disarm the system, enable Option 2 in “LOCATION 442”on page 233.

+ 9 +

Codepad Panic Alarm

An audible codepad panic alarm will be activated when both the 1 and 3 buttons

or both the and buttons are pressed simultaneously.

Refer to Option 1 in "LOCATION 437" on page 228 if you wish to program codepadpanic to be silent. If you wish to disable the codepad panic alarm report, refer to“LOCATION 349 - 350” on page 190 for more information. A codepad panic alarmwill send a Contact ID Event Code 120 when reporting back to a base stationreceiver.

1 + 3 or +

Codepad Fire AlarmAn audible codepad fire alarm will be activated when both the 4 and 6 buttons onthe remote codepad are pressed simultaneously. A distinct fire sound is emittedthrough the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition. The fire sound isdifferent to the burglary sound.

Refer to Option 2 in "LOCATION 437" on page 228 if you wish to program codepadfire to be silent. If you wish to disable the codepad fire alarm report, refer to“LOCATION 351 - 352” on page 191 for more information. A codepad fire alarmwill send a Contact ID Event Code 110 to a base station receiver.

4 + 6Codepad Medical Alarm

An audible codepad medical alarm will be triggered when both the 7 and 9 buttons on the remotecodepad are pressed simultaneously.

Refer to Option 4 in "LOCATION 437" on page 228 if you wish to program codepad medical to besilent. If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad medical alarm report, refer to “LOCATION353 - 354” on page 191 for more information. A codepad medical alarm will send a Contact ID EventCode 100 to a base station receiver.

7 + 9

Figure 4: CP5 LED CodepadShowing Audible Alarm Buttons



Isolating ZonesIsolating zones allow you to manually disable one or more zones before arming the system in AWAYMode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. Once a zone has been isolated, access is allowed into thatzone during the armed state without activating the sirens or dialler.

An example when you may require to isolate a zone before arming in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1or STAY Mode 2 may be when a zone PIR detector may be false alarming or that you may need toleave a pet inside a particular zone whilst you are away.

Isolating zones is performed by one of two methods. One way requires the use of a valid user codewhile the other way does not. The ability to isolate zones is governed by the priority level allocated toeach user code holder. Some user code holders may not be able to isolate zones. Refer to User CodePriority on page 161 for further information. At factory default, the standard method for isolatingzones is used.

Zones that have been manually isolated using this method will send a zone bypass report (Contact IDEvent Code 570) for each zone upon arming the system. A zone bypass restore report will be sentwhen the system has been disarmed.

When you select a 24-hour burglary zone to be isolated, a Contact ID Event Code 572 will be sent. Ifyou select a 24-hour fire zone to be isolated, a Contact ID Event Code 571 will be sent.



Standard IsolatingStandard isolating allows all operators to be able to isolate zones. Therefore, no code is required to beused when isolating zones.

1. Press the button twice.Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash.

2. * Enter the required to be isolated followed by the button.The zone you just selected to be isolated will now begin to flash.

24-hour zones will automatically isolate as soon as the button has been pressed. Allother burglary zones will automatically isolate only after the system has been armed.

Repeat Step 2 if more than one zone is required to be isolated until all zones that are requiredto be isolated have been selected.

3. Press the button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated.Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state.

The zones selected to be isolated when you arm the system in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 orSTAY Mode 2 will continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed.

+ + + +

* As each zone is selected to be isolated, the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin toflash. If a mistake is made, press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by

the button. This zone is now no longer selected to be isolated and the ZONE indicatorwill extinguish.

ExampleIf you wish to manually isolate zones 1, 3 and 4, the following sequence would be entered below;

+ + 1 + + 3 +

+ 4 + +



Code To IsolateThe method of code to isolate restricts only those user codes that have the priority level Code ToIsolate set to be able to isolate zones. Therefore, if any user code has this priority level set, themethod of standard isolating will be disabled.

1. Press the button.

2. Enter your followed by the button.Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash. If you attempt to enterisolating mode with a user code that has not been allocated for code to isolate, the system willignore the attempt to enter the mode.

3. * Enter the required to be isolated followed by the button. The zone youhave just selected to be isolated will now begin to flash.

24-hour zones will automatically isolate as soon as the button has been pressed. Allother burglary zones will automatically isolate only after the system has been armed.

Repeat Step 3 if more than one zone is required to be isolated until all zones that are requiredto be isolated have been selected.

4. Press the button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated.Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state.

The zones selected to be isolated when you arm the system in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAYMode 2 will continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed.

+ +

+ + +

* As each zone is selected to be isolated, the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin toflash. If a mistake is made, press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by

the button. This zone is now no longer selected to be isolated and the ZONE indicatorwill extinguish.

ExampleIf you wish to manually isolate zones 1, 3 and 4, the following sequence would be entered below;

+ +

+ 1 + + 3 + + 4 + +



Fault Analysis ModeIf a fault should occur, the FAULT or MAINS indicator will flash and the codepad will beep onceevery minute.

If the AC mains supply has failed, the MAINS indicator will flash until the AC mains supply hasrestored. Pressing the button once will acknowledge the fault and stop the codepad frombeeping once every minute.

How To Determine The Type Of System FaultTo determine all system faults other than the AC mains supply, enter fault analysis mode by followingthe steps outlined below.

1. Hold down button 5 until two beeps are heard.The FAULT indicator will remain steady and the STAY and AWAY indicators will flash inunison with each other.

Any zone indicators displayed indicate the type of fault that has occurred. Refer to Table 25:Fault Indicators on page 52 for the list of different system faults that may occur.

2. To further determine the fault condition, you will need to hold down the corresponding buttonto that of the zone indicator displayed.

3. To exit fault analysis mode and return to the disarmed state, press the button. TheFAULT indicator will remain displayed and the codepad will cease its once a minute beep.



ZoneIndicator

FaultDescription

Hold DownButton

ZoneIndicator

FaultCondition

1 System Fault 1 1 Low Battery

2 Date & Time

3 RF Receiver Jamming

RF Receiver Tamper Switch

RF Receiver Comms Failure

4 Horn Speaker

5 Telephone Line Fail

6 E2 Fault

7 Fuse Fail

2 RF Low Battery 2 1 - 8 Zones 1 - 8 RF Low Battery

3 Zone Tamper Alarm 3 1 - 8 Zones 1 - 8 Tamper Alarm

4 Sensor Watch Fault 4 1 - 8 Zones 1 – 8 Sensor Watch

Fail

5 RF Sensor Watch 5 1 – 8 Zones 1 - 8 RF Sensor Watch

Fail

6 Communication Fail 6 1 Receiver 1 Fail

2 Receiver 2 Fail

Table 25: Fault Indicators



Fault Descriptions

System FaultA system fault will only display when any of the following faults occur. After entering fault analysis

mode, holding down button 1 will determine which of the following faults have occurred.

Low BatteryA low battery fault will register when the system detects a low capacity back-up battery. The systemautomatically performs a battery test every 4 hours and also every time you arm the system.

Date and TimeThe date and time fault will register every time the system has been powered down. This type of faultwill not cause the FAULT indicator to display on the codepad unless your installer has programmedthe automatic arming time. To program the date and time, refer to page 89.

RF Receiver FailThe RF receiver fault will register once the system has detected that the RF wireless receiver unit hasregistered RF Jamming, the RF wireless receiver has been disconnected from the control panel or hasfailed, or the RF receiver’s cover tamper switch has been activated.

Horn SpeakerThis fault will register when the system detects that the horn speaker has been disconnected. Thisfault will clear once the horn speaker has been reconnected. Your installer will need to program thesystem for this feature to operate.

Telephone Line FailA telephone line fault will register when the system detects that the telephone line has beendisconnected from the control panel. Your installer will need to program the system for this feature tooperate.

E2 FaultAn E2 fault will register when the system detects an internal checksum error. Contact your installer assoon as this fault is displayed.

Fuse FailThis fault will occur when either of the two 1 Amp fuses has blown. Contact your installer as soon asthis fault is displayed.

RF Low BatteryThis fault will occur when any wireless zone (1 – 8) has reported a low battery condition to the control

panel. Whilst you are in fault analysis mode, holding down button 2 until two beeps are heard willdisplay which zone has reported the RF Low Battery fault.

1

2



Tamper FailThis fault will occur when any zone has become open circuit. By holding down button 3 until twobeeps are heard in fault analysis mode will display which zone has reported the tamper fail fault.

Sensor Watch FaultA sensor watch fault will register because one or more detection devices has failed to detect anyintrusion during the disarmed state for the time period programmed by your installer. The fault willclear once the zone in question has detected movement and reset.

Whilst you are in fault analysis mode, holding down button 4 until two beeps are heard will displaywhich zone reported the sensor watch fault.

RF Sensor Watch FaultAn RF sensor watch fault will register because one or more wireless detection devices has failed todetect any intrusion during the disarmed state for the time period programmed by your installer. Thefault will clear once the zone in question has detected movement and reset.

Whilst you are in fault analysis mode, holding down button 5 until two beeps are heard will displaywhich zone reported the sensor watch fault.

Communication FailA communication fail will register when the control panel failed to communicate with the receivingparty (eg: monitoring company, mobile phone or pocket pager etc).

The communication fault will clear once the control panel has successfully reported to the receivingparty.

Whilst you are in fault analysis mode, holding down the 6 button until two beeps are heard willdisplay which communication fault has occurred (ie. 1 = Receiver 1 / 2 = Receiver 2).

AC Mains FailureAn AC mains supply failure will automatically flash the MAINS indicator. If the AC mains supply hasbeen disconnected continuously for more than two minutes, the remote codepad will beep the codepadbuzzer once every minute. If the control panel has been programmed to report an AC mains fail to abase station receiver, an “AC Fail" report (Contact ID Event Code 301) will be sent.

The MAINS indicator will cease to flash as soon as the AC mains supply has been reconnected. Whenthe AC mains supply has been continuously connected for a period of two minutes, the codepad willcease the once a minute beep and an “AC Fail” restore report will be sent to the base station receiver.

If Option 1 – Enable AC Fail In 1 Hour in “LOCATION 438” on page 229 has been enabled, thecodepad will flash the MAINS indicator as soon as the AC mains supply has been disconnected andwill not activate the dialler or the codepad buzzer unless the AC mains supply has been disconnectedcontinuously for a period of 1 hour.

If Option 2 – Ignore AC Mains Fail in “LOCATION 438” on page 229 has been enabled, the codepadwill not indicate when the AC mains supply has failed, but the control panel will still report if enabledan "AC Fail" report.

3

4

55

6



Remote Radio TransmitterOperations


• Remote Radio Transmitter Operations

• Indications Upon Remote Radio Transmitter Operations

• Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels

• Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes

Remote Radio Transmitter OperationsThe Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel has the ability to be remotely operated usinghand held radio remote Transmitters. There is a choice of using either a 2-channel hand heldTransmitter or a 4-channel hand held Transmitter to operate the system.

Both the 2 channel and 4-channel hand held Transmitters can remotely arm and disarm the system inAWAY Mode and activate remote panic alarms. However, the 4 channel hand held Transmitter hasthe added ability to arm the system in STAY Mode 1 and to operate the control panels programmableoutputs (eg: Allowing you to activate a garage door or outside lights etc).

Before any hand held radio Transmitter can operate the control panel, you will need to teach thecontrol panel the Transmitters radio code. Refer to Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codeson page 58 for more information.



Indications Upon Remote Radio Transmitter OperationsWhen using either the 2-channel or 4-channel hand held transmitters to operate the system, audibleand/or visual indications can be provided via the horn speakers or the strobe. This will allow you tooperate the system from outside the premises with confidence. Only the installer can program thefeature of audible and/or visual indication beeps.

Refer to Option 4 – Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm/Disarm and Option 8 – Assign Button 4On Transmitter To Operate STAY Mode 1 in “LOCATION 436” on page 227. Refer to “LOCATION435” on page 221 to set the volume of speaker beeps.

No Of Beeps System Status

1 System Disarmed

2 System Armed In AWAY Mode

1 Two ToneBeep System Armed In STAY Mode 1

Table 26: Horn Speaker Indication Beeps For Remote Operations

Strobe Duration System Status

3 Seconds System Disarmed

6 Seconds System Armed In AWAY Mode

6 Seconds System Armed In STAY Mode 1

Table 27: Strobe Indications For Remote Operations

Remote Radio User Code Priority LevelsThe radio remote hand held Transmitters may only be programmed to operate as user codes 9 - 16.Priority levels can be allocated to each radio remote hand held Transmitter, allowing the Transmitterto only arm the system or arm and disarm the system. Refer to User Code Priority on page 161 formore information.

Before any hand held radio Transmitter can operate the control panel, you will need to teach thecontrol panel the Transmitters radio code. Refer to Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codeson page 58 for more information.

Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 57


Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User CodesUp to eight remote radio hand held Transmitters (User Codes 9 – 16) may be used to operate thesystem. Before the control panel will accept any of the signals from any radio remote hand heldTransmitter, the control panel must learn the code of the Transmitter.

You may substitute the Master Code with the Installer Code if required to perform the functionof changing or deleting remote radio user codes.

How To Add Or Change A Remote Radio User Code


2. Enter the (9-16) that you wish to add or change followed by the button.

Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate. Refer to"Table 28: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers" on page 59.

3. Enter the found on the back of the radio remote hand held Transmitter followed

by the button. Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators willextinguish.

If you wish to add or change additional remote radio user codes, repeat this procedure as manytimes as required.

+ 1 +

+ + + +

When adding or changing remote radio user codes, this function will automatically terminate if

a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button. One long beepindicates the code entered already exists or an incorrect user number has been selected.

Radio remote user codes must be allocated to one or more areas when operating a SolutionUltima 880 control panel that has been partitioned. Refer to User Code Allocations on page 245for more information.



How To Delete A Remote Radio User Code


2. Enter the (9-16) that you wish to delete followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate. Refer to“Table 28: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers” on page 59.

3. Press the button to delete the user code.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish.

If you wish to delete additional remote radio user codes, repeat this procedure as many times asrequired.

+ 1 +

+ + +

When deleting remote radio user codes, this function will automatically terminate if a button is

not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button. One long beep indicates thean incorrect user number has been selected.

UserNo

Zone 1Indicator

Zone 2Indicator

Zone 3Indicator

Zone 4Indicator

Zone 5Indicator

Zone 6Indicator

Zone 7Indicator

Zone 8Indicator

MAINSIndicator

9 ü ü

10 ü

11 ü ü

12 ü ü

13 ü ü

14 ü ü

15 ü ü

16 ü ü

Table 28: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers

Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 59


System Functions


• Installer Code Functions

• Master Code Functions

• Hold Down Functions

System FunctionsThis section explains the more advanced features that are required for testing and regular maintenanceof the system. Features such as Installer Code Functions, Master Code Functions and Hold DownFunctions are covered in this section.

Installer Code FunctionsInstaller Code Functions allow the installer to perform various system tests without the need to knowa Master Code. These functions can only be carried out when the system is in the disarmed state.

To enter the required Installer Code function, enter the followed by the required digit and the button. All available Installer Code functions are listed in “Table 29:

Installer Code Functions” outlined below.

+ +

Function Description Page

0 Add / Delete RF Wireless Devices 63/641 Set Number Of Days Until The First Test Report 652 Change Domestic Telephone Numbers 663 Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence 68

4 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones 715 EDMSAT - Satellite Siren Service Mode 72

6 Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On/Off 737 Walk Test Mode 74

8 Event Memory Recall Mode 75

Table 29: Installer Code Functions



Adding Or Deleting RF Wireless DevicesThe control panel has the ability to accept a maximum total of 16 wireless devices on any or all of the8 zones that are used by the system. This means that it is possible to connect wireless PIRs, reedswitches and smoke detectors directly to the control panel. Each zone can have multiple wirelessdevices allocated (eg: Zone 1 may have 16 wireless devices allocated and the remaining seven zonesare hard wired). Refer to RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 – 8) and RF Device Mapping (Devices 9 –16) on page 250 for more information.

How To Program A RF Wireless Device


2. Enter the (1-16) that you wish to change followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate to displaythe RF device number that you have selected.

3. Enter the found on the back of the RF device followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish.

If you wish to program additional RF wireless devices, repeat this procedure as many times asrequired.

+ 0 +

+ + + +

When adding RF devices, this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed

within sixty seconds or by pressing the button. One long beep indicates the codeentered already exists or an incorrect user number has been selected.

ExampleIf you require to program RF wireless device number 3 with a 9-digit ID number of 000094946,follow the steps outlined below and remember to substitute the default Installer Code (1234) with theInstaller Code that you have programmed.

1234 + 0 +

+ 3 +

+ 000094946 +

0

System Functions 63


How To Delete A RF Wireless Device


2. Enter the (1-16) that you wish to delete followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate to displaythe RF device number that you have selected.

3. Press the button to delete the RF device.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish.

If you wish to delete additional RF wireless devices, repeat this procedure as many times asrequired.

+ 0 +

+ + +



Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test ReportIf you require the first test to report (Contact ID Event Code 602) the day after you are installing thecontrol panel and you have programmed the repeat interval between each test report for every 7 days,you will need to set when the first test report will occur. If the first test report is not set using thisInstaller Code Function, the first test report will be sent to the base station receiver in the number ofdays programmed in the repeat interval. Refer to "LOCATION 372 - 378" on page 197 for setting thetest report time and repeat interval.

How To Set The First Test Report


2. Enter the to wait (1 - 15 days) until the first test report is required.

3. Press the button when finished.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish. The system willnow return to the disarmed state.

+ 1 +

+ +

Each time you enter Installer's Programming Mode after you have set when the first test reportwill occur, the first test report time will default back to the repeat interval time between eachtest report as set in “LOCATION 378”.

Test reports will not report if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000. The number of day’sdecrements by one at 00:00 hours as set in "LOCATION 901 – 904" on page 222.

ExampleIf you programmed the repeat interval in the test reports for every seven days, but wish to have thefirst test report to begin in two days time, follow the sequence outlined below;

1234 + 1 +

+ 2 +

1

System Functions 65


Changing Domestic Phone NumbersWhen the system has been set up for domestic dialling, this function allows the installer to view andprogram the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the event of an alarm. For a moredetailed description, refer to Domestic Dialling on page 125 for further information.

How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers


If there are telephone numbers already programmed, they will be displayed one digit at a timevia the remote codepad indicators. Refer to "Table 31: Codepad Indicators When ChangingTelephone Numbers" on page 67 for the indicators and their meanings.

If there are no telephone numbers programmed, a further two beeps will be heard after enteringthis mode. These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last telephone numberhas been displayed.

2. Enter all the digits for , one digit at a time. You will notice as each digit is entered,the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate.

3. If there is more than one telephone number, press the button followed by the 4 buttonafter the last digit of the telephone number. This will insert a break between the first telephonenumber and the second telephone number. If there is only one phone number, press the button to exit this mode.

4. Enter all the digits for , one digit at a time. You will notice as each digit isentered, the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate.

5. After the last digit of the second telephone number, press the button to exit this modeunless a third telephone number is required. If there is a third telephone number to be

programmed, press the button followed by the 4 button to insert a break between thesecond telephone number and the third telephone.

+ 2 +

+ + + 4 + +

Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program

0 0 8 81 1 9 92 23 3 * Followed By 14 4 # Followed By 25 5 Four Second Pause Followed By 36 6 Break Followed By 47 7 15 Followed By 5

Table 30: Domestic Dialling Digits

2



ExampleIf you wish to program two separate telephone numbers (9672 1777 and 9672 1233), follow thesequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the telephonenumbers that you wish to program.

1234 + 2 +

+ 96721777 + + 4+ 96721233 +

How To Disable Domestic DiallingIf at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason (eg. You are moving house and donot wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc), you may enter thefollowing sequence.

+ 2 + + + 4 +

DigitZone 1

IndicatorZone 2

IndicatorZone 3

IndicatorZone 4

IndicatorZone 5

IndicatorZone 6

IndicatorZone 7

IndicatorZone 8

IndicatorMAINS

Indicator

0 ü 1 ü 2 ü

3 ü 4 ü 5 ü

6 ü 7 ü

8 ü 9 ü ü * ü ü

# ü ü Pause ü ü Break ü ü

15 ü ü

Table 31: Codepad Indicators When Changing Telephone Numbers

System Functions 67


Change Telco Arm/Disarm SequenceThis feature allows you to program the Telco Arm Sequence (Option 1) and Telco Disarm Sequence(Option 2). This feature is only available if your telecommunication provider has the call forwardoption available.

Option 1 – Telco Arm SequenceThis allows you to program the Call Forward – Immediate On sequence or Call Forward – No Answersequence that will automatically operate when you arm the system in the AWAY Mode.

Note: The examples given in this feature is only applicable to Australia.

Call Forward – Immediate OnYou can redirect calls to anywhere in Australia, including mobiles, pagers and answering services.When Call Forward is turned on, your telephone will not ring.

Call Forward – No AnswerWhen your telephone is not answered within 20 seconds, this feature redirects all incoming calls toanother number anywhere in Australia, but you can still make outgoing calls.

Option 2 – Telco Disarming SequenceThis allows you to automatically disable the call forward sequence upon disarming the system.


0 0 8 81 1 9 92 23 3 * Followed By 14 4 # Followed By 25 5 Four Second Pause Followed By 36 6 Break Followed By 47 7

Table 32: Telco Arm/Disarm Dialling Digits

3



How To Program Telco Arming Sequence


2. Press button 1 followed by the button to change the telco arm sequence. Three beepswill be heard.

If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed, the sequence will bedisplayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators.

If there is no call forward sequence programmed, a further two beeps will be heard afterentering this mode. These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the previous callforward sequence has been displayed.

3. Enter the call forward sequence that you require (eg: *61 Phone Number # if you wish toprogram the Call Forward – No Answer Sequence or *21 Phone Number # if you wish toprogram the Call Forward – Immediate Sequence).

Remember that when you program a * in the telco arm sequence, you enter *1 and whenyou program the # in the telco arm sequence, you enter *2.

4. Press the button when finished. Two beeps will be heard and the system will return tothe disarmed state.

ExampleIf you wish to automatically divert all unanswered incoming calls to another telephone number (eg:9672 1777) when the system is armed in AWAY Mode, follow the example sequence below andreplace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you wish todivert all calls to.

1234 + 3 +

+ 1 +

+ 161 + 96721777 + 2 +

How To Disable The Telco Arming SequenceIf at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence, you may enter the following sequence.

+ 3 + + 1 +

+ + 4 +

System Functions 69


How To Program The Telco Disarm Sequence


2. Press button 2 followed by the button to change the telco disarm sequence. Threebeeps will be heard.

If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed, the sequence will bedisplayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators.

If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed, a further two beeps will be heard afterentering this mode. These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forwardsequence has been displayed.

3. Enter the call forward disable sequence that you require (eg: #61# if you wish to disable theCall Forward - No Answer sequence, or #21# if you wish to disable the Call Forward -Immediate On sequence.

Remember that when you program a # in the telco disarm sequence, you enter *2.

4. Press the # button when finished. Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to thedisarmed state.

+ 3 +

2 +

261 2 +

How To Disable The Telco Disarm SequenceIf at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarm sequence, you may enter the following sequence.

+ 3 + + 2 +

+ + 4 +



Setting STAY Mode 2 ZonesThis function allows the installer to select which zones are to be automatically isolated when thesystem is armed in STAY Mode 2.

Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2, the zones selected using this function will beautomatically isolated.

To arm the system in STAY Mode 2, hold down the 0 button until two beeps are heard. Refer toHold Down Functions on page 93 or Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 on page 45 for moreinformation.

How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones

1. Enter your followed by 4 and the button.Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash.

2. * Enter the that you wish to automatically isolate followed by the button.The corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash to display that you have selected thatzone to be automatically isolated every time you arm the system in STAY Mode 2.

If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2, repeat step 2until all zones required have been selected.

3. Press the button to exit this function.Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state. The zones that wereselected to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 and the STAY indicator will extinguish.

+ 4 +

+ + +

* As each zone has been selected to be isolated, the corresponding ZONE indicator will beginto flash. If a mistake has been made, press the zone number that was incorrectly entered

followed by the button. This zone is now no longer programmed to be isolated andthe ZONE indicator will extinguish.

This function will not operate on Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have beenpartitioned.

ExampleIf you wish to select zones 2, 5 and 6 to be automatically isolated when arming in STAY Mode 2,follow the sequence below.

1234 + 4 +

+ 2 + + 5 + + 6 + +

4

System Functions 71


How To Disable STAY Mode 2 ZonesIf at any time you wish to disable all zones selected to be automatically isolated for STAY Mode 2,you may enter the following sequence.

+ 4 +

+

Satellite Siren Service ModeIf an EDMSAT is connected to Output 1, this function will allow you to perform service work on thesystem without triggering the satellite siren. The satellite siren will return to its normal working statethe next time the system is armed.

How To Enter Satellite Siren Service Mode

1. Enter your followed by 5 and the button.Three beeps will be heard.

+ 5 +

5



Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On/OffTelephone monitor mode allows the remote codepad to be used for a visual representation of datatransmissions between the control panel and the base station receiver. The dialling sequence is alsoshown in this mode.

The codepad will beep once every two seconds while telephone monitor mode is active regardless ofwhether the system is in Installer's Programming Mode or normal operating mode. The first fiveindicators are used to display the progressive steps for a transmission to the base station receiver.

After you enter telephone monitor mode, hold down button 9 until two beeps are heard to initiate atest report.

Zone Indicator Dialling Event

1 Telephone Line Seized

2 Dialling Phone Number

3 Handshake Received

4 Data Is Being Sent

5 Kiss-Off Received

None Telephone Line Released

Table 33: Telephone Monitor Mode Indications

How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode On

1. Enter your followed by 6 and the button.Three beeps will be heard.

2. Hold down button 9 until two beeps are heard to initiate a test report.

How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode Off

1. Enter your followed by 6 and the button.Two beeps will be heard.

+ 6 +

6

System Functions 73


Walk Test ModeWalk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly.Before activating walk test mode, isolate any zones that are not required for testing. Refer to IsolatingZones on page 48 for further information. Refer to LOCATION 327 - 328 on page 184 to programwalk test mode reports.

How To Enter Walk Test Mode

1. Enter your followed by 7 and the button.Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash. Thecodepad will beep once every second while the system is in walk test mode.

2. Unseal and seal the zones to be tested.The codepad will sound one long beep and the horn speaker will sound one short beep everytime a zone is sealed or unsealed.

3. Press the button to exit this function.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish. The system hasnow returned to the disarmed state.

+ 7 +

7



Event Memory Recall ModeThis function allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system. The eventmemory recall mode reports all alarms and arming/disarming of the system in the AWAY Mode,STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2. This function helps with trouble shooting system faults. Theevents are displayed via the codepad indicators.

How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode

1. Enter your followed by 8 and the button.Three beeps will be heard. The events will be played back via the codepad indicators inreverse chronological order.

+ 8 +

ExampleIf the events were as follows:

Event No Event Description


2 Alarm In Zone 3

3 Alarm In Zone 4

4 System Disarmed

Table 34: Event Memory Recall - Example Events

The event memory playback will report as follows:

Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description

4 All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed

3 Zone 4 + AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 4


1 AWAY Indicator Illuminates System Armed In AWAY Mode

Table 35: Event Memory Recall - Example Event Playback

A beep and an illuminated indicator indicate each event. Resetting a 24-hour alarm in the disarmedstate is indicated by one beep only. After the last event, three beeps will be heard to indicate the endof playback. The replay of event memory can be terminated at any time by pressing the button.

If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2, the STAY indicator will display duringthe event memory playback. There is no differentiation between arming the system in STAYMode 1 and STAY Mode 2.

If the control panel has been powered down, the memory of all events will be lost.

All Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have been partitioned will only replay the last tenevents for each area.

8

System Functions 75


Master Code FunctionsMaster Code Functions are designed to allow those users that have the appropriate priority level toperform certain functions of a supervisory level. These functions can only be carried out when thesystem is in the disarmed state.

The default Master Code is 2580 and is known as User Code 1. It is possible for thesystem to have multiple Master Codes. Refer to "User Code Priority" on page 161 for moreinformation.

To enter the required Master Code function, enter the followed by the required

digit and the button. All available Master Code functions are listed in “Table 36:Master Code Functions” outlined below.

+ +

Function Description Page

0 Arm Or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time 76

1 Changing and Deleting User Codes/Radio Codes 77/79

2 Changing Domestic Phone Numbers 81

3 Changing Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence 83

4 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones 86

5 Turning Outputs On/Off 87

6 Setting The Date and Time 89

7 Walk Test Mode 90

8 Event Memory Recall Mode 91

Table 36: Master Code Functions

Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The Same TimeThis Master Code function only operates on Solution Ultima 880 systems that have beenpartitioned. The Master Code function allows those Master Code user codes that are allocated to bothArea 1 and Area 2 to arm or disarm both areas at the same time.

This allows the user to ensure that both areas will be armed or disarmed by pressing one extra buttonrather that entering a code twice to ensure both areas are armed or disarmed. This function can beused to arm both areas at the same time from either the CP5 Area Addressable Codepad (CP500A) orthe Master Partitioned Codepad (CP500P). Refer to Option 2 in “LOCATION 445” on page 242 toenable this feature.

How To Arm/Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time

1. Enter your followed by 0 and the button.Two beeps will be heard and both areas will be armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode.

+ 0 +

0



Changing and Deleting User CodesThis function allows a Master Code holder to add/change or delete any of the system user codes.When using a Solution Ultima 880 control panel that has been partitioned, user codes cannot beadded, changed or deleted by the Master Code holder unless they (the user code) have been allocatedto an area or the same area as the Master Code. Refer to User Code Allocations on page 245 for moreinformation

How To Add Or Change A User Code


2. Enter the (1-8) that you wish to change followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate. Refer to"Table 37: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers" on page 78.

3. Enter the digits required for the followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish.

If you wish to add or change additional user codes, repeat this procedure as many times asrequired.

+ 1 +

+ + + +

When adding or changing user codes, this function will automatically terminate if a button is

not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button. One long beep indicates thecode entered already exists or an incorrect user number has been selected.

ExampleIf you wish to program user code number 2 as 4627, follow the steps outlined below and remember tosubstitute the default Master Code (2580) with the Master Code that has been programmed.

2580 + 1 +

+ 2 +

+ 4627 +

1

System Functions 77


How To Delete A User Code


2. Enter the (1-8) that you wish to delete followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate. Refer to"Table 37: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers" on page 78.


If you wish to delete additional user codes, repeat this procedure as many times as required.

+ 1 +

+ + +

When deleting user codes, this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed

within sixty seconds or by pressing the button. One long beep indicates an incorrectuser number has been selected.

UserNo

Zone 1Indicator

Zone 2Indicator

Zone 3Indicator

Zone 4Indicator

Zone 5Indicator

Zone 6Indicator

Zone 7Indicator

Zone 8Indicator

1 ü 2 ü 3 ü

4 ü 5 ü 6 ü

7 ü 8 ü

Table 37: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers

ExampleIf you wish to delete user code number 3, follow the steps outlined below and remember to substitutethe default Master Code (2580) with the Master Code that has been programmed.

2580 + 1 +

+ 3 +

+



Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User CodesThis function allows a Master Code holder to add/change or delete any of the system user codes.

How To Add Or Change A Remote Radio User Code


2. Enter the (9-16) that you wish to change followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate. Refer to"Table 38: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers" on page 80.

3. Enter the found on the back of the radio remote hand held Transmitter followedby the # button. Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish.

If you wish to add additional remote radio user codes, repeat this procedure as many times asrequired.

+ 1 +

+ + +

When adding or changing remote radio user codes, this function will automatically terminate if

a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button will also terminatethe session at anytime. One long beep indicates the code entered already exists or an incorrectuser number has been selected.

1

System Functions 79


How To Delete A Remote Radio User Code


2. Enter the (9-16) that you wish to delete followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate. Refer to"Table 38: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers" on page 80.


If you wish to delete additional remote radio user codes, repeat this procedure as many times asrequired.

+ 1 +

+ + +

When deleting remote radio user codes, this function will automatically terminate if a button is

not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button will also terminate thesession at anytime. One long beep indicates the an incorrect user number has been selected.

UserNo

Zone 1Indicator

Zone 2Indicator

Zone 3Indicator

Zone 4Indicator

Zone 5Indicator

Zone 6Indicator

Zone 7Indicator

Zone 8Indicator

MAINSIndicator

9 ü ü

10 ü

11 ü ü

12 ü ü

13 ü ü

14 ü ü

15 ü ü

16 ü ü

Table 38: Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers



Changing Domestic Phone NumbersWhen the system has been set up for domestic dialling, this function allows the Master Code holder toview and program the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the event of an alarm.For a more detailed description, refer to Domestic Dialling on page 125 for further information.

How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers


If there are telephone numbers already programmed, they will be displayed one digit at a timevia the remote codepad indicators. Refer to "Table 40: Codepad Indicators When ChangingDomestic Telephone Numbers" on page 82 for the indicators and their meanings.

If there are no telephone numbers programmed, a further two beeps will be heard after enteringthis mode. These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last phone number hasbeen displayed.






+ 2 +

+ + + 4 + +




2

System Functions 81


ExampleIf you wish to program two separate telephone numbers (9672 1777 and 9672 1233), follow thesequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the telephonenumbers that you wish to program. Remember to substitute the default Master Code (2580) with theMaster Code that has been programmed.

2580 + 2 +

+ 96721777 + + 4+ 96721233 +

How To Disable Domestic DiallingIf at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason (eg. You are moving house and donot wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc), you may enter thefollowing sequence.

+ 2 + + + 4 +

DigitZone 1

IndicatorZone 2

IndicatorZone 3

IndicatorZone 4

IndicatorZone 5

IndicatorZone 6

IndicatorZone 7

IndicatorZone 8

IndicatorMAINS

Indicator

0 ü

1 ü

2 ü

3 ü

4 ü

5 ü

6 ü

7 ü

8 ü

9 ü ü

* ü ü

# ü ü

Pause ü ü

Break ü ü

Table 40: Codepad Indicators When Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers



Change Telco Arm/Disarm SequenceThis feature allows you to program the Telco Arm Sequence (Option 1) and Telco Disarm Sequence(Option 2). This feature is only available if your telecommunication provider has the call forwardoption available

Option 1 – Telco Arm SequenceThis allows you to program the Call Forward – Immediate On sequence or Call Forward – No Answersequence that will automatically operate when you arm the system in AWAY mode.

Note: The examples given in this feature are only applicable to Australia.

Call Forward – Immediate OnYou can redirect calls to anywhere in Australia, including mobiles, pagers and answering services.When Call Forward – Immediate On is turned on, your telephone will not ring.

Call Forward – No AnswerWhen you telephone is not answered within 20 seconds, this feature redirects all incoming calls toanother number anywhere in Australia.

Option 2 – Telco Disarm SequenceThis allows you to automatically disable the call forward sequence upon disarming the system.

Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on Call Forward operations.




3

System Functions 83


How To Program Telco Arming Sequence


2. Press button 1 followed by the button to change the telco arm sequence. Three beepswill be heard.

If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed, the sequence will bedisplayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators.

If there is no call forward sequence programmed, a further two beeps will be heard afterentering this mode. These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forwardsequence has been displayed.

3. Enter the call forward sequence that you require (eg: *61 Phone Number # if you wish toprogram the Call Forward – No Answer sequence or *21 Phone Number # if you wish toprogram the Call Forward – Immediate sequence).

Remember that when you program a * in the telco arm sequence, you enter *1 and whenyou program the # in the telco arm sequence, you enter *2.

4. Press the button when finished. Two beeps will be heard and the system will return tothe disarmed state.

+ 3 +

1 +

161 + + 2 +

ExampleIf you wish to automatically divert all unanswered incoming calls to another telephone number (eg:9672 1777) when the system is armed in AWAY Mode, follow the example sequence below andreplace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you wish todivert all calls to. Remember to substitute the default Master Code (2580) with the Master Code thathas been programmed.

2580 + 3 +

+ 1 + + 161 + 96721777+ 2 +

How To Disable The Telco Arm SequenceIf at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence, you may enter the following sequence.

+ 3 + + 1 +

+ + 4 +



How To Program The Telco Disarm Sequence


2. Press button 2 followed by the button to change the telco disarm sequence. Threebeeps will be heard.

If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed, the sequence will bedisplayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators.

If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed, a further two beeps will be heard afterentering this mode. These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forwardsequence has been displayed.

3. Enter the call forward disable sequence that you require (eg: #61# if you wish to disable theCall Forward – No Answer sequence, or #21# if you wish to disable the Call Forward –Immediate On sequence.

Remember that when you program the # in the telco disarm sequence, you enter *2.

4. Press the # button when finished.Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state.

+ 3 +

2 +

261 2 +

How To Disable The Telco Disarm SequenceIf at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarm sequence, you may enter the following sequence.

+ 3 + + 2 +

+ + 4 +

System Functions 85


Setting STAY Mode 2 ZonesThis function allows the Master Code Holder to select which zones are to be automatically isolatedwhen the system is armed in STAY Mode 2. Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2, thezones selected using this function will be automatically isolated.

To arm the system in STAY Mode 2, hold down the 0 button until two beeps are heard. Refer toHold Down Functions on page 93 or Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 on page 45 for moreinformation.

How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones

1. Enter your followed by 4 and the button.Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash.

2. * Enter the that you wish to automatically isolate followed by the button.The corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash to display that you have selected thatzone to be automatically isolated every time you arm the system in STAY Mode 2.

If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2, repeat step 2until all zones required have been selected.

3. Press the button to exit this function.Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state. The zones that wereselected to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 and the STAY indicator will extinguish.

+ 4 +

+ + +

* As each zone has been selected to be isolated, the corresponding ZONE indicator will beginto flash. If a mistake has been made, press the zone number that was incorrectly entered

followed by the button. This zone is now no longer programmed to be isolated andthe ZONE indicator will extinguish.

This function will not operate on Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have beenpartitioned.

ExampleIf you wish to select zones 2, 5 and 6 to be automatically isolated when arming in STAY Mode 2,follow the sequence below. Remember to substitute the default Master Code (2580) with the MasterCode that has been programmed.

2580 + 4 +

+ 2 + + 5 + + 6 + +

4



How To Disable STAY Mode 2 ZonesIf at any time you wish to disable all zones selected to be automatically isolated for STAY Mode 2,you may enter the following sequence.

+ 4 +

+

Turning Outputs On/OffIf an output has been programmed for remote operation, you can turn the remote output on or offusing this Master Code function or remotely using the Alarm Link Software.

For this Master Code Function to operate, one or more programmable outputs will need to beprogrammed with one of the following output event types.

Output Number 1 = Output Event Type – 2,8 on page 207.Output Number 2 = Output Event Type – 2,9 on page 207.Output Number 3 = Output Event Type – 2,10 on page 207.

How To Turn An Output On From The Remote Codepad


2. Enter the required (1-3) followed by the button.Three beeps will be heard and the output will now turn on. Repeat step 2 if more than oneoutput is required to be turned on.

3. Press the button again to exit this function.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish.

+ 5 +

+ + +

Example

If Output 2 has been programmed as 281000 in “LOCATION 386 – 391”, the Master Codeholder may turn on this output following the steps outlined below;

2580 + 5 +

+ 1 + +

5

System Functions 87


How To Turn An Output Off From The Remote Codepad


2. Enter the required (1-3) followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the output will now turn off. Repeat step 2 if more than oneoutput is required to be turned off.

3. Press the button again to exit this function.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish.

+ 5 +

+ + +

Example

If Output 2 has been programmed as 281000 in “LOCATION 386 – 391”, the Master Codeholder may turn off this output following the steps outlined below;

2580 + 5 +

+ 1 + +



Setting The Date and TimeThis function only needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the system hasbeen powered down.

If the date and time has not been set using this function, the date and time fault will only display whenthe Auto Arming Time in “LOCATION 426 - 429” on page 220 has been programmed, or when you

enter Fault Analysis Mode by holding down the 5 button.

How To Set The New Date and Time





+ 6 +

DD + MM + YY + HH + MM+

ExampleIf the date and time needs to be set for the 1st February 1997 at 10:30 PM, program the date and timeas follows;

2580 + 6 +

01 + 02 + 97 + 22 + 30+

6

System Functions 89


Walk Test ModeWalk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly.Before activating walk test mode, isolate any zones that are not required for testing. Refer to IsolatingZones on page 48 for further information. Refer to “LOCATION 327 - 328” on page 184 to programwalk test mode reports.

How To Enter Walk Test Mode

1. Enter your followed by 7 and the button.Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash. Thecodepad will beep once every second while the system is in walk test mode.

2. Unseal and seal the zones to be tested.The codepad will sound one long beep and the horn speaker will sound one short beep everytime a zone is sealed or unsealed.

3. Press the button to exit this function.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish. The system hasnow returned to the disarmed state.

+ 7 +

7



Event Memory Recall ModeThis function allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system. The eventmemory recall mode reports all alarms and arming/disarming of the system in the AWAY Mode,STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2. This function helps with trouble shooting system faults. Theevents are displayed via the codepad indicators.

How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode

1. Enter your followed by 8 and the button.Three beeps will be heard. The events will be played back via the codepad indicators inreverse chronological order.

+ 8 +

ExampleIf the events were as follows:

Event No Event Description


2 Alarm In Zone 3

3 Alarm In Zone 4

4 System Disarmed

Table 42: Event Memory Recall - Example Events

The event memory playback will report as follows:

Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description

4 All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed



1 AWAY Indicator Illuminates System Armed In AWAY Mode

Table 43: Event Memory Recall - Example Event Playback

A beep and an illuminated codepad indicator indicate each event. Resetting a 24-hour alarm in thedisarmed state is indicated by one beep only. After the last event, three beeps will be heard to indicatethe end of playback. The replay of event memory can be terminated at any time by pressing the button.

If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2, the STAY indicator will display duringthe event memory playback. There is no differentiation between arming the system in STAYMode 1 and STAY Mode 2.

If the control panel has been powered down, the memory of all events will be lost.

All Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have been partitioned will only replay the last tenevents for each area.

8

System Functions 91


User Code Functions

+ +

Function Description

0 Arm Or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time (CC488)

Table 44: User Code Functions

Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The Same TimeThis user code function only operates on Solution Ultima 880 systems that have been partitioned.The function allows those user codes that are allocated to both Area 1 and Area 2 to arm or disarmboth areas at the same time.

This allows the user to ensure that both areas will be armed or disarmed by pressing one extra buttonrather that entering a code twice to ensure both areas are armed or disarmed. This function can beused to arm both areas at the same time from either the CP5 Area Addressable Codepad (CP500A) orthe Master Partitioned Codepad (CP500P). Refer to Option 2 in “LOCATION 445” on page 242 toenable this feature.

How To Arm/Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time

1. Enter your followed by 0 and the button.Two beeps will be heard and both areas will be armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode.

+ 0 +

0



Hold Down FunctionsHold down functions have been incorporated to allow easy activation of specific operations. When abutton is held down for two seconds, two beeps will be heard and a particular function will operate.The hold down functions available are listed below.

Arm The System In AWAY Mode

Holding the # button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in AWAY Mode. Option 2in "LOCATION 441" on page 232 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate.

This hold down function will not operate on Solution Ultima 880 control panels when

partitioned using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad (CP500P). Holding the # button downuntil two beeps are heard on a CP5 Area Addressable codepad (CP500A) will arm thecorresponding area in AWAY Mode.

Arm The System In STAY Mode 1

Holding the * button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 1. Option2 in "LOCATION 441" on page 232 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate.

If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle, holding the * button down a second time willdisarm the system from STAY Mode 1. If you require single button disarming from STAY Mode 1using this hold down function, Option 4 in "LOCATION 441" on page 232 will need to be enabled.

If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has triggered, a valid user code will need to be used todisarm the system.

Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 179 for information on programming each zone to be automaticallyisolated in STAY Mode 1.

This hold down function will not operate on Solution Ultima 880 control panels when

partitioned using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad (CP500P). Holding the * button downuntil two beeps are heard on a CP5 Area Addressable codepad (CP500A) will arm thecorresponding area in STAY Mode 1.

#

*

System Functions 93


Arm The System In STAY Mode 2

Holding the 0 button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 2. Option2 in "LOCATION 441" on page 232 will need to be enabled for this function to operate.

If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle, holding the 0 button down a second time willdisarm the system from STAY Mode 2. If you require single button disarming from STAY Mode 2using this hold down function, Option 4 in "LOCATION 441" on page 232 will need to be enabled.

If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has been triggered, a valid user code will need to be used todisarm the system.

Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones using the Installer Code function on page 71 or Setting STAYMode 2 Zones using the Master Code function on page 86 for more information.

STAY Mode 2 is not available to Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have been partitioned.

Horn Speaker Test

Holding the 1 button down until two beeps are heard will sound the horn speaker for a two-secondburst. No other sounding device will sound in this mode.

Bell Test

Holding the 2 button down until two beeps are heard will sound the internal screamers for a two-second burst. No other sounding device will sound in this mode.

If an EDMSAT (SS914) has been connected to the control panel, this function will test both the hornspeaker and the strobe connected to the satellite siren for two seconds.

Strobe Test

Holding the 3 button down will operate the strobe. No other device will operate in this mode.

If an EDMSAT (SS914) has been connected to the control panel, this function will also test the strobeon the satellite siren.

How To Turn Strobe Test ON

1. Hold down the 3 button until three beeps are heard.The strobe will begin to flash.

How To Turn Strobe Test OFF

1. Hold down the 3 button until two beeps are heard.The strobe will stop flashing.

0

1

2

3



Turning Day Alarm On and Off

Holding the 4 button down will turn day alarm on or off. If the STAY indicator is required toindicate the status of day alarm operation (enabled/disabled), refer to Option 8 in "LOCATION 440"on page 231 for further information. The STAY indicator when enabled, will flash once every 3seconds to display when day alarm is active.

How To Turn Day Alarm ON

1. Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard.Day alarm has now been turned on.

How To Turn Day Alarm OFF

1. Hold down the 4 button until two beeps are heard.Day alarm has now been turned off.

Fault Analysis ModeThere are various system faults that can be detected by the control panel. When any of these faults arepresent, the FAULT indicator will begin to flash and the codepad will beep once every minute. Referto Fault Descriptions on page 53 for a more detailed description on each fault type.

How To Determine The Type Of Fault

1. Hold the 5 button down until two beeps are heard.The STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash in unison with the FAULT indicator. Oneor more ZONE indicators (1-8) will illuminate to indicate the type of fault that has occurred.

How To Exit Fault Analysis Mode

1. To exit fault analysis mode, press the button.The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish and return you to the disarmed state.

4

5

System Functions 95


ZoneIndicator

FaultDescription

Hold DownButton

ZoneIndicator

FaultCondition

1 System Fault 1 1 Low Battery

2 Date & Time

3 RF Receiver Jamming

RF Receiver Tamper Switch

RF Receiver Comms Failure

4 Horn Speaker

5 Telephone Line Fail

6 E2 Fault

7 Fuse Fail

2 RF Low Battery 2 1 - 8 Zones 1 - 8 RF Low Battery

3 Zone Tamper Alarm 3 1 - 8 Zones 1 - 8 Tamper Alarm

4 Sensor Watch Fault 4 1 - 8 Zones 1 – 8 Sensor Watch

Fail

5 RF Sensor Watch 5 1 – 8 Zones 1 - 8 RF Sensor Watch

Fail

6 Communication Fail 6 1 Receiver 1 Fail

2 Receiver 2 Fail

Table 45: Fault Indicators

Initiate A Modem Call

Holding the 6 button down until two beeps are heard will force the control panel to dial the call backtelephone number programmed in "LOCATION 159 - 174" on page 147 in an attempt to connect tothe installer’s remote computer.

The remote computer will be required to be running the Alarm Link Software (CC816) and will needto be set to “Waiting For An Incoming Call". If no call back telephone number has been programmed,

holding down the 6 button will have no effect.

Reset Latching Outputs

Holding the 7 button down until two beeps are heard will reset any programmable output that hasbeen programmed to remain on once it has been activated.

The output will need to be programmed with a latching polarity. Refer to Output Polarity on page 211for further information.

6

7



Codepad Buzzer Tone Change

Holding the 8 button down continuously will change the tone of the buzzer in the remote codepad.There are fifty different tones to choose from between 1500 Hz - 5000 Hz and they are specific toeach codepad. In a multiple codepad installation, each codepad can have a different tone.

How To Change The Tone Of The Buzzer

1. To change the tone of the codepad buzzer, hold the 8 button down continuously.The tone of the buzzer will start to increase in pitch.

2. Release the 8 button when the desired tone has been reached.

Every time the system has been powered down, each codepad will need their individual tonereset using this function.

How To Determine The Area That The Codepad Belongs To

When using Hold Down Function 8 on Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have beenpartitioned, the codepad will indicate the area that the codepad belongs to.

1. Hold the 8 button down until two beeps are heard.

2. A ZONE indicator will illuminate to indicate which area that the codepad belongs to when thesystem has been partitioned.

Zone 1 = Area 1 CodepadZone 2 = Area 2 CodepadZone 7 = Master Partitioned CodepadNo ZONE indicator means that the codepad has incorrect settings or incorrect codepad used.

3. Press the button to exit this mode.

Send Test Report

Holding the 9 button down until two beeps are heard will send a test report (Contact ID Event Code602) which is used to test the dialling and reporting capabilities of the system without causing thesirens to sound.

A test report will not be sent if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000. This feature is only applicable ifthe control panel has been programmed to report via the telephone.

8

9

System Functions 97


Remote SystemOperations Via Telephone


• Remote Arming Via The Telephone

Remote Arming Via The TelephoneThis feature allows you to arm your system from any remote location via the telephone line. Forobvious security reasons, the system cannot be disarmed using this method. To make use of thisfeature, you will require a touch tone telephone or the Phone Controller (CC911).

How To Remotely Arm Your System Via The Telephone1. Call the telephone number that your control panel has been connected to.

2. When the control panel answers the incoming call, a short jingle will be heard. Hold the phonecontroller to the mouthpiece of the telephone and press the button on the side of the unit for 3

seconds. You can alternatively press the * button on the touch tone telephone for 3 secondsto arm the system.

If you hear a number of strange sounding tones (modem tones) when the control panel answersthe incoming call, this means that the system has been programmed for remote programmingfunctions. Simply wait for a pause in the tones and follow step 2 to remotely arm the system.

3. After releasing the button on the phone controller or the * button on the touch tone telephone,two beeps will be heard to indicate that the system has armed in AWAY Mode.

4. Hang up the telephone and the system will remain armed.

If the control panel does not answer the call, this means that the system may already be armed, remotefunctions have not been enabled or the ring count has been set to zero. Refer to Option 2 in"LOCATION 177" on page 153 to enable remote arming via the telephone and “LOCATION 175” onpage 148 to set the number of rings before the control panel will answer.

Where both remote arming and Upload/Download via the Installer’s remote computer have beenselected, the control panel will answer the call expecting the remote computer. This is easilynoticed, as the modem negotiating tones will be heard rather than the remote arming jingle.

If you attempt to arm a Solution Ultima 880 control panel that has been partitioned, both areaswill arm in AWAY Mode. Arming individual areas is not available using this method.



Programming


• Programming

• Programming With The Remote Codepad

• Programming With The Hand Held Programmer

• Programming With The Programming Key

• Programming Option Bits

• Installer’s Programming Commands

• Disable Factory Default

• Defaulting The Control Panel

ProgrammingThe programming options of the control panel are stored in a non-volatile Eprom. This memory willhold all the relevant configuration and user specific data even during a total power loss.

The data retention time is as long as ten years without power; therefore, no reprogramming will berequired after powering the control panel down.

The data can be changed as many times as required without the need for any additional specialisedequipment. This memory is laid out in numerous locations, each of which holds the data for a specificfunction.

15 is the maximum value that can be programmed into any location.

In general, the entire programming sequence will consist of nominating the required location numberand then enter or change the current data. You will repeat this procedure until all the data has beenprogrammed to suit your requirements. The factory default settings have been selected for reportingto the monitoring station in the Contact ID Format.

The Installers Code only gives access to the Installer's Programming Mode and does NOT arm anddisarm the system. Installer’s Programming Mode can not be entered when the system is armed, or atany time during siren run time.

Programming of the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel can be carried out via any ofthe following three methods.

• Remote Codepad

• Hand Held Programmer (CC814)

• Alarm Link Upload/Download Software (CC816)

Example

Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1

LOCATION 000 - 015 0000000000000000

LOCATION 000 LOCATION 004

LOCATION 001

LOCATION 015



Programming With The Remote CodepadWhen programming the control panel via the remote codepad, the system must be in the disarmedstate with no alarm memory present.

To access the Installer’s Programming Mode, enter the four digit followed by the

button. The factory default Installer Code is 1234. Two beeps will be heard and boththe AWAY and the STAY indicators will flash simultaneously to indicate that you have enteredInstaller’s Programming Mode.

When entering Installer’s Programming Mode, you will be automatically positioned at “LOCATION000”, the beginning of the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1.

DataValue

Zone 1Indicator

Zone 2Indicator

Zone 3Indicator

Zone 4Indicator

Zone 5Indicator

Zone 6Indicator

Zone 7Indicator

Zone 8Indicator

MAINSIndicator

0

1 ü

2 ü

3 ü

4 ü

5 ü

6 ü

7 ü

8 ü

9 ü ü

10 ü

11 ü ü

12 ü ü

13 ü ü

14 ü ü

15 ü ü

Table 46: Codepad Indicators When Programming

ExampleTo access Installer’s Programming Mode, enter the followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and both the AWAY and the STAY indicators will flash simultaneously toindicate that you have entered Installer’s Programming Mode. The codepad indicators will display thecurrent data stored in the first location (LOCATION 000).

To move to another programming location, enter the required followed by the

button. The data of the new location will now be displayed (eg. 34 followed by the button will automatically step you to the beginning of the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1).

To move to the next location, press the button. This will step you to the next location and thedata in that location will be displayed (eg. If you are currently positioned at “LOCATION 034”,pressing the button will step you to “LOCATION 035”).

If you press the button without previously entering a location number, the system will step back

one location (eg. If you are positioned at “LOCATION 035” and you press the button, you willstep back one location to LOCATION 034).

Programming 103


To change data in the current location, enter the new value (0 – 15) followed by the button.This will store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same location. Youwill notice that the new information programmed will be displayed on the codepad indicators (eg. If

you enter the value 14 followed by the button, both ZONE 4 and the MAINS indicator willilluminate).

To move to the next location, press the button. The data in the next locations data will now bedisplayed.

To exit the Installer’s Programming Mode, enter command 960 followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish. The system will nowreturn to the disarmed state and is now ready for use.

Refer to Installer’s Programming Commands on page 107 for further information on commands thatcan be performed during access of Installer’s Programming Mode.



Programming With The Hand Held ProgrammerThe Hand Held Programmer (CC814) has five, seven segment displays. The three sevensegment displays on the left display the current location number and the two seven segmentdisplays on the right display the data for the location currently being displayed.

To connect the hand held programmer, locate the socket marked PROGRAMMING KEYfound at the top of the PCB (printed circuit board) next to the Auxiliary Module socket.Observe the triangular markings on the PCB and line them up with the markings on thehand held programmers connecting socket.

When the hand held programmer is correctly connected onto the printed circuit board, onebeep will be heard and four centre bars on the hand held programmer will illuminate witheither an 'A' or 'U' suffix to indicate the system is armed or unarmed. Only when theInstaller's Programming Mode has been accessed will any numerals appear on the display.

When connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel, make sure that the switch onthe hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external programming key hasbeen connected. Failing to do this may corrupt the control panel's memory. If this occurs, thecontrol panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limitedwhere a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel's memory.

Example

To access the Installer's Programming Mode, enter the followed by the # button.

The factory default Installers Code is 1234. Two beeps will be heard and the hand heldprogrammer will display the current data stored in "LOCATION 000".

To move to another programming location, enter the required followed by the

# button. The data of the new location will now be displayed (eg. 34 followed by the # buttonwill automatically step you to the beginning of the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1).

To move to the next location, press the # button. This will step you to the next location and the datain that location will be displayed (eg. If you are currently positioned at “LOCATION 034”, pressing

the # button will step you to “LOCATION 035”).

If you press the * button without previously entering a location number, the system will step back

one location (eg. If you are positioned at “LOCATION 035” and you press the * button, you willstep back one location to LOCATION 034).

To change data in the current location, enter the new value (0 – 15) followed by the * button. Thiswill store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same location. You willnotice that the new information programmed will be displayed on the data display of the hand held

programmer (eg. If you enter the value 14 followed by the * button, the data display will display14).

To move to the next location, press the # button. The data in the next location will now bedisplayed.

Programming 105


To exit the Installer's Programming Mode, enter command 960 followed by the # button. Twobeeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state. Refer to Installer’s ProgrammingCommands on page 107 for further information on commands that can be performed during access ofthe Installer's Programming Mode.

When using the hand held programmer, any reference in this manual made to the button

should be considered as the * button and the button considered as the # button.

Programming With The Programming KeyThe Programming Key (CC891) is a unique device that will allow you to store or copy programminginformation from your control panel. Once the programming key has information stored in themicroprocessor, the programming key may be used to easily program other existing SolutionUltima 844/862/880 control panels with the same programming data, or be alternatively used forback up purposes of existing information.

Connecting a programming key, which has been pre-programmed directly onto the control panel inthe disarmed state, will automatically initiate a data transfer from the programming key to the controlpanel memory.

If you have a new programming key, you should first enter the Installer's Programming Mode andprogram the system as required before connecting the programming key to the control panel.

To connect the programming key, locate the socket marked PROGRAMMING KEY found at the topof the PCB (printed circuit board) next to the Auxiliary Module socket. Observe the triangularmarkings on the printed circuit board and line them up with the markings on the programming key.

To copy the control panel's data into the programming key, access Installer’s Programming Mode (eg:

1234 followed by the # button) and enter Installer’s Programming Command 962followed by the # button. Refer to Command 962 - Copy Control Panel Memory To ProgrammingKey on page 111 for further information.

To exit the Installer's Programming Mode, enter command 960 followed by the # button. Twobeeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state. Before removing theprogramming key, wait two seconds for the activity LED to return to its normal state. Theprogramming key will now become your standard data pattern for future programming of your controlpanels.

It should be noted that when entering the Installer's Programming Mode, inserting a programming keyand then changing any location will cause a simultaneous update of not only the programming keysdata, but also the control panels data. Therefore, you are not able to change data in the programmingkey without the same location being changed in the control panels memory.

Connecting a Programming Key (CC891) to the control panel when the programming keysmemory is blank will corrupt the control panel's memory unless the Installer's ProgrammingMode has been entered first. If this occurs, then the control panel will need to be returned toElectronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlockthe control panel's memory.



Programming Option BitsWhen programming these locations, you will notice that there are four alternatives per location. Youmay select one, two, three or all of these alternatives for each location, however, only one number isrequired to be programmed. This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together.

ExampleIf at "LOCATION 177" you want options 1, 2 and 4, add the numbers together and the total is thenumber to be programmed. In this example, the number to be programmed is 7 (ie. 1 + 2 + 4 = 7).

Option Description

1Enabled = Allow Dialler Reporting FunctionsDisabled = Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions

2 Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone

4 Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed

8Enabled = Use Bell 103 For FSK FormatDisabled = CCITT V21 Format

Table 47: Example - Programming Option Bits

Installer’s Programming CommandsThere are ten different commands that can be used to perform various functions once the Installer'sProgramming Mode has been entered. To issue the command required, enter the corresponding

numerical code followed by the # button (eg: 965# would set the system for domestic dialling forReceiver 1).

Command Description Page

958 Enable/Disable Zone Status Mode 108

959 Test Programming Key 109

960 Exit Installer’s Programming Mode 110

961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings 110

962 Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming Key 111

963 Copy The Programming Key Data To The Control Panel 112

964 Erase Programming Key 113

965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format (Receiver 1) 114

966Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations DuringProgramming 115

999 This Command Displays The Control Panel’s Software VersionNumber Or Control Panel Type

117

Table 48: Installer's Programming Commands

Programming 107


Command 958 - Enable/Disable Zone Status ModeThis function enables and disables the zone status display mode when using the hand heldprogrammer. The hand held programmer will display the zones on the seven-segment display fromleft to right. If there is a dash illuminated on the display of the hand held programmer, thecorresponding zone is unsealed and if the display is blank, the zone is sealed.

The third (or centre) display shows either the number 4 or the number 8. The number 4 constantlyilluminated indicates that zones 1 - 4 are being displayed. The number 8 constantly illuminatedindicates that zones 5 - 8 are being displayed.

Pressing the # button will toggle the display between the zones. This feature will prove to be veryuseful during installation as the hand held programmer allows you to view the status of the zonesdirectly at the control panel, saving you time and money.

How To Enable Zone Status Mode

1. Enter Installers Programming Mode (ie. 1234 followed by the # button).Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currentlyprogrammed in “LOCATION 000”.

2. Enter command 958 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard and the number 4 will illuminate to indicate zones 1 – 4 are beingdisplayed.

How To Disable Zone Status Mode

1. Enter command 958 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard and you will return to the Installer’s Programming Mode.

ExampleA " - " in the display indicates the zone is unsealed.A blank display indicates the zone is sealed.

ÀÀ-4-- indicates that zone 1 is sealed and zones 2, 3 and 4 are unsealed.

-ÀÀ8ÀÀ- indicates that zones 5 and 8 are unsealed and zones 6 and 7 are sealed.



Command 959 - Test Programming KeyThis command initiates a test to be carried out on the programming key. Only the Programming Key(CC891) may be used with the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel.

The programming key test is non-destructive and any data in the programming key will remain intactafter the test has been completed. One long beep indicates that the programming key test has failedand two beeps indicates a successful test.

If the programming key has been removed before the test is complete or the programming key hasfailed, the data in the programming key has become corrupt. Remember not to remove theprogramming key while the activity LED is constantly illuminated or pulsing rapidly.

How To Test The Programming Key

1. Enter Installer's Programming Mode (ie. 1234 followed by the # button).Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the remotecodepad to indicate that you have entered Installer’s Programming Mode. You will also noticethat the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in “LOCATION 000”.

2. Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panelfound at the top of the PCB (printed circuit board) next to the Auxiliary Module socket.

3. Enter command 959 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the programming key has successfully been tested. If you hearda long beep after issuing this command, the programming key has become corrupt and willneed to be erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Command 964 - Erase Programming Keyon page 113 for more information.

4. Before removing the programming key from the control panel, enter command 960followed by the # button to exit the Installer's Programming Mode. Two beeps will be heard.The STAY and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad and the systemwill return to the disarmed state.

Failing to exit Installer’s Programming Mode before removing the programming key mayresult in corrupting the data in the programming key.

Programming 109


How To Test The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer1. Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY,

make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that noexternal key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer.

2. Enter the Installer's Programming Mode (ie. 1234 followed by the # button).Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currentlyprogrammed in “LOCATION 000”.

3. Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand heldprogrammer.

4. Enter command 959 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the programming key has successfully been tested. If you hearda long beep after issuing this command, the programming key has become corrupt and willneed to be erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Command 964 - Erase Programming Keyon page 113 for more information.

5. Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer, enter command

960 followed by the # button to exit the Installer's Programming Mode. Two beeps willbe heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state.

Failing to exit Installer’s Programming Mode before removing the programming key mayresult in corrupting the data in the programming key.

Command 960 - Exit Installer's Programming ModeThis command is used to exit the Installer's Programming Mode after you complete programming thecontrol panel.

You may exit Installer’s Programming Mode from any location by entering command 960followed by the # button. Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state.When using the remote codepad to program the system, you will notice that the STAY and AWAYindicators will extinguish to indicate that you have terminated Installer’s Programming Mode.

Command 961- Reset Control Panel Back To Factory DefaultSettingsThis command will reset the control panel back to the factory default values. Refer to the defaultvalues shown throughout this manual or the programming sheets on pages 273 - 293 for moreinformation.

You may reset the control panel back to the factory default settings from any location when in

Installer’s Programming Mode. This is achieved by entering command 961 followed by the #button. Two beeps will be heard and the system will default back to the factory default values.



Command 962 - Copy Control Panel Memory To ProgrammingKeyThis command is used to copy the control panel memory to the programming key. Only theProgramming Key (CC891) may be used with the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 controlpanel.

How To Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming Key


2. Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panelfound at the top of the PCB (printed circuit board) next to the Auxiliary Module socket.

3. Enter command 962 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the control panel memory has successfully been copied into theprogramming key. If you heard a long beep after issuing this command, the programming keyhas become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Command964 - Erase Programming Key on page 113 for more information.

4. Before removing the programming key from the control panel, enter command 960followed by the # button to exit Installer's Programming Mode. The STAY and AWAYindicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad to indicate that the system has returnedto the disarmed state.

Failing to exit Installer’s Programming Mode before removing the programming key mayresult in corrupting the programming key.

How To Copy The Panel Memory To Programming Key Using The Hand HeldProgrammer1. Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY,


2. Enter Installer's Programming Mode (ie. 1234 followed by the # button).Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currentlyprogrammed in “LOCATION 000”.


4. Enter command 962 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the control panel memory has successfully been copied into theprogramming key. If you heard a long beep after issuing this command, the programming keyhas become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Command964 - Erase Programming Key on page 113 for more information.


960 followed by the # button to exit Installer's Programming Mode. Two beeps will beheard and the system will now return to the disarmed state.


Programming 111


Command 963 - Copy From Programming Key To Control PanelThis command is used to copy data from the programming key to the control panel. Only theProgramming Key (CC891) may be used with the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 controlpanel.

How To Copy The Programming Key Memory To The Control Panel


2. Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the controlpanel found at the top of the PCB (printed circuit board) next to the Auxiliary Module socket.

3. Enter command 963 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the programming key's data has successfully been copied into tothe control panel. If you heard a long beep after issuing this command, the programming keyhas become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Command964 - Erase Programming Key on page 113 for more information.

4. Before removing the programming key from the control panel, enter command 960followed by the # button to exit Installer's Programming Mode. The STAY and AWAYindicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad and the system will return to thedisarmed state.


How To Copy Programming Key Memory To Control Panel Using Hand HeldProgrammer1. Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY,




4. Enter command 963 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the programming key's data has successfully been copied into tothe control panel. If you heard a long beep after issuing this command, the programming keyhas become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Command964 - Erase Programming Key on page 113 for more information.






Command 964 - Erase Programming KeyThis command erases all data from the programming key. Only the Programming Key (CC891) maybe used with the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel.

How To Erase The Programming Key


2. Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the controlpanel found at the top of the PCB (printed circuit board) next to the Auxiliary Module socket.

3. Enter command 964 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the programming keys data has been deleted.

4. Before removing the programming key from the control panel, enter command 960followed by the # button to exit Installer's Programming Mode. The STAY and AWAYindicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad and the system will return to thedisarmed state.


How To Erase The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer1. Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY,




4. Enter command 964 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the programming keys data has been deleted.




Programming 113


Command 965 - Set Up Domestic Dialling FormatCommand 965 has been included to allow the set up of the domestic dialling format a one stepoperation. Refer to page 126 for more information on Domestic Dialling Format.

After you enter Installer's Programming Mode, enter command 965 followed by the # button.The command will automatically set Receiver 1 to domestic reporting and set the following locationsonly for Receiver 2. No other locations will be changed when command 965 has been issued.

All domestic telephone numbers are stored in “LOCATION 478 – 525”. For more information onprogramming domestic dialling, refer to Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting on page127 for more information.

Location Description Setting

LOCATION 032 Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 1 (Handshake Tone)

LOCATION 033 Transmission Format 4 (Domestic)

LOCATION 034 – 039 Subscriber ID Number 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 (1 Beep)

LOCATION 332 Zone Status Reporting Options 2 (Receiver 2 Only)

LOCATION 333 – 334 Open/Close Reports 11, 12 (Open/Close Reports)

LOCATION 335 Open/Close Reporting Options 2 (Receiver 2 Only)

LOCATION 356 - 358 System Status – Access Denied 6, 7, 12 (Access Denied)

LOCATION 359 System Status Reporting Options 2 (Receiver 2 Only)

LOCATION 360 - 366 Test Reporting Time 0, 0, 0, 0, 7, 1, 0 (Test Reports)

LOCATION 367 Test Reporting Dialler Options 1 (Receiver 1 Only)

Table 49: Command 965 Defaults

As you can see from the table above, the transmission format has automatically been set for domesticdialling and the Subscriber ID Number has been set for one identification beep. All reports exceptzone status reporting and system status reporting have been allocated to Receiver 1 for domesticdialling.

This means that the zone status reports including zone bypass, zone trouble, sensor watch and alarmrestore codes as well as system status reports including fuse fail, AC fail, low battery and accessdenied reports have been allocated to Receiver 2 and will not report unless Receiver 2 has also beenset up to report.



Command 966 - Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping OfLocationsThis command allows automatic stepping of locations while programming via Installer’sProgramming Mode. When enabled via the hand held programmer, the decimal point of the left mostdisplay will reflect the mode of operation.

If the decimal point is illuminated on the hand held programmer, automatic stepping of locations is

active. An automatic increment of the location being programmed will occur as soon as the * buttonis pressed positioning you at the next location ready for programming.

If the decimal point is not illuminated on the hand held programmer, the automatic stepping oflocations is disabled and programming the next location will need to be manually selected by pressing

the # button. As you can see from the examples below, auto step mode can be very useful whenprogramming successive locations.

When programming via the remote codepad, there are no visual indications to display if automaticstepping of locations has been enabled.

How To Enable Automatic Stepping Of Locations

1. Enter Installer’s Programming Mode (ie. 1234 followed by the # button).Two beeps will be heard.

If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash toindicate that you have entered Installer’s Programming Mode. You will also notice that theremote codepad will display the data currently programmed in “LOCATION 000”.

2. Enter command 966 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard.

How To Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations


Example(Auto Step Enabled)To enter the Primary Telephone Number "02 pause 9672 1055" with auto step enabled (ie. Decimalpoint illuminated when using the hand held programmer).

Press 0 followed by the # button.(This will position you at "LOCATION 000" being the start of the Primary Telephone Number ForReceiver 1).

+ * + 2 + * + + * + 9 + * + 6 + * + 7 + * +

2 + * + 1 + * + + * + 5 + * + 5 + * + 0 + *

Programming 115


Example(Auto Step Disabled)To enter the Primary Telephone Number "02 pause 9672 1055" with auto step disabled (ie. Decimalpoint extinguished when using the hand held programmer).

Press 0 followed by the # button.(This will position you at "LOCATION 000" being the start of the Primary Telephone Number ForReceiver 1).

+ * + # + 2 + * + # + + * + # + 9 + * + # + 6+ * + # + 7 + * + # + 2 + * + # + 1 + * + # + +

* + # + 5 + * + # + 5 + * + # + 0 + *



Command 999 - Display Panel Type Or Software VersionNumberWhen using this command via the remote codepad, the codepad will display the panel version of thecontrol panel. As there are three different control panel’s using the same PCB, it is difficult to knowwhich control panel the PCB has been set up to be.

The codepad will display a 4, 6 or 8 depending on the software of the control panel. Refer to the“Table 50: Control Panel Type” below for more information.

Indicator Control Panel Type

4 Solution Ultima 844



Table 50: Control Panel Type

When using this command via the hand held programmer, the hand held programmer will display thesoftware version number of the control panel.

How To Display The Control Panel Type Or Software Version Number

1. Enter Installer’s Programming Mode (ie. 1234 followed by the # button).Two beeps will be heard and the data currently programmed in “LOCATION 000” will bedisplayed via the hand held programmer or remote codepad.

If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash toindicate that you have entered Installer’s Programming Mode.


If you are using the hand held programmer, the right display will indicate the software versionnumber of the control panel.

If you are using the remote codepad, the codepad will display a zone indicator correspondingto the control panel type. Refer to “Table 50: Control Panel Type” above for moreinformation.

3. Press the # button to exit this command and return to the Installer’s Programming Mode.

4. Enter command 960 followed by the # button to exit Installer's Programming Mode.Two beeps will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state.

If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to indicatethat you have returned to the disarmed state.

Programming 117


Disable Factory Default

LOCATION 900 0

This feature prevents the control panel from being manually defaulted via the default button or toprevent using a programming key to perform an automatic download to the control panel when thesystem is disarmed.

A zero programmed into this location will allow defaulting of the control panel. If 15 has beenprogrammed into this location, defaulting of the control panel will not be permitted and the InstallerCode MUST be used for further programming of the control panel.

If the Installer Code is not known, the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design andManufacturing Pty Limited. A nominal fee applies for this service.

Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited does not recommend the use of this feature.

If the option is required to disable the option of being able to default the control panel, a specialprocedure has been implemented to eliminate the possibility of accidentally setting this option. Thedefault button on the PCB must be held down while programming this location.

How To Prevent Manual Defaulting Of The Control Panel

1. Enter Installer’s Programming Mode (ie. 1234 followed by the # button).Two beeps will be heard and the data currently programmed in “LOCATION 000” will bedisplayed via the hand held programmer or remote codepad.

If you are using a remote codepad, the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash toindicate that Installer’s Programming Mode has been accessed.

2. From the hand held programmer or remote codepad, go to "LOCATION 900".

(eg. 900 followed by the # button).

3. Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button.The default button will be located at the top of the PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEYconnecting socket.

4. Program a 15 into "LOCATION 900".

(eg. 15 followed by the * button).

5. Release the default button.

6. Enter command 960 followed by the # button to exit Installer's Programming Mode.Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state.

If you are using a remote codepad, the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to indicatethat the system has returned to the disarmed state.



Defaulting The Control PanelIf the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel does not have "LOCATION 900"programmed as 15, follow the procedure outlined below to successfully default the control panel backto the factory default settings.

How To Default The Control Panel Via Installer Code1. Enter Installer Programming Mode.

(eg. 1234 followed by the # button). Two beeps will be heard. The STAY and AWAYindicators will begin to flash to indicate that you have accessed programming mode.

2. Enter Installer’s Programming Command 961 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard after the control panel has successfully been defaulted.

3. Enter Installer’s Programming Command 960 followed by the # button.Two beeps will be heard. The STAY and AWAY indicators will cease to flash and the systemwill return to the disarmed state.

The control panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default settings.

How To Default The Control Panel Via Default Button1. Disconnect the AC mains supply and the backup battery from the control panel.

2. Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button.The default button is located at the top of the PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEYconnecting socket.

3. Reconnect the AC mains supply to the control panel.

4. After reconnecting the AC mains supply, wait for 3-5 seconds before releasing the DEFAULTbutton.

5. Disarm the system using the default Master Code (eg. Enter 2580 followed by the #button).

The control panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default settings.

If you hear the dialler seize relay (RL2) click four times while attempting to default the controlpanel, this would indicate that the feature of defaulting the control panel has been disabled in“LOCATION 900” on page 118. The control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Designand Manufacturing Pty Limited for exchange where a service fee will be charged to unlock thecontrol panel's memory if the Installer Code is not known.

Programming 119


Alarm Link Operations


• Alarm Link Software

• Remote Connect

• Remote Connect With Customer Control

• Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification

• Remote Connect With Call Back Verification

• Direct Connect

• Alarm Link Options

Alarm Link SoftwareThe Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel can be remotely programmed or controlledvia an IBM or compatible personal computer via the Alarm Link Software (CC816). This facility willallow you to make alterations to your customers control panel without the need to leave your office,thus improving customer service and saving you time and money. For country locations where acontrol panel may be situated hundreds of kilometres from your office, the Upload/Download featureis invaluable.

When selecting the control panel type during the set up of a new customer database in the Alarm LinkSoftware, refer to the table below to select the software version number that corresponds to the controlpanel type required.

Control Panels Software Version Select Panel Type

Solution Ultima 844 - 1.00 S844_V10



Table 51: Alarm Link Panel Forms

After selecting the correct panel type when adding a new customer in the Alarm Link Software, theSubscriber ID Number and the Installer Code must match that of the control panel for synchronisationwhen making connection to the control panel. If these two locations do not match that of the controlpanel, the computer and the control panel will not synchronise.

Remote ConnectThe remote connect feature allows you to establish a connection through the telephone network fromyour IBM or compatible computer to the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panelanywhere in the country where a telephone line is present. The advantages of this are very obviousand having this facility will allow you to offer faster service to your clients.

Remote Connect With Customer ControlIf you wish to configure the control panel so that a remote connection can only be established whenthe client initiates it through the remote codepad, you will need to program the following information.

"LOCATION 159 - 174" on page 147 will need to have the Call Back Telephone Numberprogrammed and Option 1 in "LOCATION 180" on page 124/156 will need to be disabled. Thecontrol panel has now been set so that the client has control of when a remote connection can beestablished.

To activate the control panel to dial the remote computer to establish a link, hold the 6 button downuntil two beeps are heard on the remote codepad.



Remote Connect Without Call Back VerificationRemote connect without call back verification can be handy where you have a need to performUpload/Download functions from multiple locations.

There are two methods that you may program so that the call back verification is disabled. It shouldbe noted that by using this feature you are reducing the security of the control panel.

Method One

Method one allows you to call the control panel from any remote location without the need of havingthe control panel call back to the computer to establish a link. In using method one, the customer has

no access to initiate a modem call by holding down the 6 button. The following locations need to beprogrammed for this method to operate.

"LOCATION 159 - 174" on page 147 should be programmed as zeros. Option 1 in "LOCATION 180"on page 124/156 will need to be enabled and Option 2 needs to be disabled. The control panel willnow allow a connection of the first call without calling the remote computer back to make contact.

Method Two

Method two allows you to program a call back telephone number so that the customer can still initiatea modem call when required, but when calling the control panel via the computer from any remotelocation, the control panel does not call back the remote computer to establish a link.

"LOCATION 159 - 174" on page 147 should have the call back telephone number programmed ifrequired. Option 1 in "LOCATION 180" on page 124/156 will need to be enabled and Option 2 needsto be disabled.

The control panel will now allow a connection of the first call without calling the remote computer

back to make contact but still allow the customer to initiate a modem call by holding down the 6button when required.

Remote Connect With Call Back VerificationRemote connect with call back verification offers the highest degree of data security by incorporatinga two level security check.

The first is the Installer Code combined with the Subscriber ID Number needs to match that of thecontrol panel. Secondly, the control panel will call back the programmed call back telephone numberto establish the valid connection. The "Call Back Telephone Number" is the telephone line that themodem and computer has been connected to.

"LOCATION 159 - 174" on page 147 must be programmed with the Call Back Telephone Numberand both Option 1 and Option 2 in "LOCATION 180" on page 124/156 will need to be enabled.

Direct ConnectThe direct connect feature has been incorporated giving the installer a simple method forprogramming the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel at the office or on site visitsusing a portable computer. There is no need for telephone lines or modems which makesprogramming of the control panel completed easily in minutes.

All that is required is the Direct Link Cable (CC808) connected to the correct serial port on your IBMor compatible computer and the other end to the auxiliary module socket on the control panel.

When using the direct connect method of connecting to the control panel, Option 1 in “LOCATION180” on page 124/156 does not require to be enabled. The direct connect method of programming oroperating the control panel will operate regardless of this option being set.

Alarm Link Operations 123


Alarm Link Options

LOCATION 180 3

Option Description

1 Enable Upload/Download Via Alarm Link

2 Enable Alarm Link Call Back

4 Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm

8 Use External Modem Module (CC811) For Alarm Link Operations

Table 52: Alarm Link Options

Enable Upload/Download Via Alarm LinkThis option will need to be selected if you require to use the Alarm Link Software (CC816) toremotely program the control panel. The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link Software ifthis option is not selected. Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 122 for more information.

Enable Alarm Link Call BackIf this option has been selected and a call back telephone number has been programmed, the remoteprogramming computer must be connected to the telephone line that has been programmed in the callback telephone number locations. Refer to “LOCATION 159 - 174” on page 147 for moreinformation.

If this option is not selected, it will allow the installer to connect to their customers control panel fromany remote location when attempting upload/download operations without the need to wait for thecontrol panel to call back to the remote computer, but still allows the ability for the customer to

initiate the modem call from the codepad when requested by holding down the 6 button. Refer toAlarm Link Software on page 122 for more information.

Terminate Alarm Link Connection On AlarmIf the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software (CC816) andan alarm has registered, the Alarm Link session will be terminated and the relevant alarm messagewill then be sent to the base station receiver.

If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver, the session will not beterminated. If this option has not been selected and an alarm has registered, the Alarm Link softwarewill prompt the operator with a “Terminate” or “Continue” message.

Use External Modem Module (CC811) For Alarm Link OperationsIf this option has been selected, the control panel will use the external plug-in Module (CC811) forremote programming operations via the Alarm Link Software (CC816). This option should only beenabled where the telephone line is susceptible to noise.

1

4

2

8



Domestic Dialling


• Domestic Dialling Format

• Domestic Dialling Function

• Acknowledge Domestic Dialling

• Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting

• Disable Domestic Dialling

Domestic Dialling FormatThe locations of the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number for Receiver 1 orReceiver 2 are only used for base station reporting and pager reporting. When either Receiver 1 orReceiver 2 is set up for domestic reporting, both the primary telephone number and the secondarytelephone number will be ignored.

The domestic dialling telephone numbers are located separately in “LOCATIONS 478 – 525” makingprovision to store up to 48 digits. The 48 locations are used to store any number of telephonenumbers and subject to the length of each telephone number, it is possible to store 4 or more differenttelephone numbers for domestic dialling.

If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 have been set up for domestic reporting format, you would stillhave 48 data locations and both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 would use the same domestic telephonenumbers. The ability to program separate domestic telephone numbers for both Receiver 1 andReceiver 2 is not available.

Refer to Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting on page 127 for more information.

Domestic Dialling FunctionWhen the control panel has activated into alarm condition, it will commence dialling the firsttelephone number programmed. If a busy or engaged tone has been detected, the control panel willhang up and commence dialling the second telephone number (if one is programmed). However, thefirst call will be counted as one unsuccessful dialling attempt. If the second telephone number is alsobusy or an engaged tone is detected, the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the thirdtelephone number (if one is programmed) or return to the first telephone number.

If a busy tone is not detected, the control panel will assume that the telephone has been answered andwill begin sending its transmission. The transmission sequence consists of an identification beep,followed by a siren tone and a long pause. The transmission sequence will repeat itself until thecontrol panel receives an acknowledgment tone during the pause or the control panel automaticallyhangs up after a period of two minutes. The identification beep will allow the customer to verifywhich control panel made the call if more than one control panel is reporting to the same telephonenumber. The identification beep is programmed in "LOCATION 039" of the Subscriber ID NumberFor Receiver 1 or “LOCATION 079” of the Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2.

A maximum of six calls per alarm event will be made when the control panel has been set up for"Domestic Dialling Format". This count includes any unsuccessful calls. The counter will bereset if the zone re-triggers and a further six attempts will be made. The control panel will stopdialling after six attempts or three successful calls. The control panel will also stop dialling if avalid user code has been entered at the remote codepad.

If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 have been programmed for domestic dialling, the maximumnumber of calls per alarm event is twelve.

Acknowledge Domestic DiallingOnce the call has been received, if it is not acknowledged during any of the transmission pauses by

pressing the * button on a touch tone telephone or by using the Phone Controller (CC911), thecontrol panel will continue to send its transmission for a period of 2 minutes. It will then hang up andcommence dialling the next telephone number. If the call is successfully acknowledged, the controlpanel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event.



Setting Up and Programming Domestic ReportingProgramming the control panel for domestic reporting has been made extremely simple by the use ofthe Installer's Programming Command 965. Refer to Command 965 - Set Up Domestic DiallingFormat on page 114 for more information. However, if you wish to set up Receiver 2 for DomesticDialling, you will need to manually program the reporting functions.

How To Set Up The Control Panel For Domestic Dialling

1. Enter Installer's Programming Mode (EG: 1234 followed by the button).Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash.

2. Enter Command 965 followed by the button.Two beeps will be heard. The control panel has now been set up for Domestic DiallingFormat. Refer to Command 965 - Set Up Domestic Dialling Format on page 114 for moreinformation.

3. Exit Installer's Programming Mode by entering Command 960 followed by the button. Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish. Thesystem will now return to the disarmed state.


If there are telephone numbers programmed, they will be displayed one digit at a time via thecodepad indicators.

If there are no telephone numbers programmed, a further two beeps will be heard after enteringthis mode. These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last phone number hasbeen displayed.






+ 2 +

+ + + 4 + +

Domestic Dialling 127





ExampleIf you wish to program two separate telephone numbers (9672 1777 and 9672 1233), follow thesequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the telephonenumbers that you wish to program.

2580 + 2 +

+ 96721777 + + 4+ 96721233 +

Disable Domestic DiallingIf at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason (eg. You are moving house and donot wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc), you may enter thefollowing sequence.

+ 2 + + + 4 +



Dialler Reporting Formats


• Transmission Formats

• Contact ID Format

• Point ID Codes

• 4+2 Reporting Format

• Basic Pager Reporting Format

• Basic Pager Display Information

Transmission FormatsWhen making use of the control panel's dialling and communication features, there are a number oftransmission formats available. Refer to "LOCATION 033" on page 141 to set the requiredtransmission format for Receiver 1 and “LOCATION 073” on page 144 to set the requiredtransmission formation for Receiver 2. The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panelcomes factory default to report in the Contact ID Format.

Contact ID FormatThis format can identify hundreds of protection zones by their unique code and provides a single digitevent qualifier and a three-digit event code that quickly identifies the condition being reported.

SubscriberID Number Qualifier

EventCode

GroupNumber

Point IDNumber

SSSS Q XYZ GG CCCFour Digit

Subscriber IDNumber

Event Qualifier, Which GivesSpecific Event Information.1 = New Event Or Opening3 = New Restore Or Closing

Event Code(Made Up Of 3

Hex Digits)

Group Number(Made Up Of 2

Hex Digits)

Point ID Number(Made Up Of 3

Hex Digits)

Table 54: Contact ID Format Breakdown

In general, Contact ID reporting format is very simple as most of the Event Codes and Point ID Codeshave been predefined. The base station software usually only has the ability to identify a zone goinginto alarm by its Point ID Code and usually pays little attention to the Event Code.

Refer to "Table 55: Point ID Codes" on page 132 for further information on the Solution Ultima844/862/880 Point ID Codes.



Point ID CodesThe table below shows the different Point ID Codes and Event Codes that are sent to the base stationreceiver when using Contact ID Reporting Format. All event codes are fixed and will always send thesame code as there are no programming locations made available to alter these.

EventCode

EventDescription

Point IDNumber Explanation Page

130 Burglary Zone Zone Specific1 - 8

Burglary Page 171

100 Medical Zone 24 Hour Medical Page 171

120 Panic Zone 24 Hour Panic Page 171

122 Hold-Up Zone 24 Hour Hold-Up Page 171

137 Tamper Zone 24 Hour Tamper Page 171

133 Burglary Zone 24 Hour Burglary Page 171

110 Fire 24 Hour Fire Page 171

401 Open/Close Report User Specific1 - 16

Opening – User #Closing – User #

Page 189

402Open/Close ReportPartitioned

User Specific1 - 16

Opening – User #Closing – User #

Page 189

456 Partial Close ReportUser Specific

1 – 16 Closing – User # Page 154

301 AC Mains Fail 030 AC Power Page 193

309 Low Battery 031 Battery Test Failure Page 194

121 Codepad DuressUser Specific

1 - 16 Duress Alarm Page 190

120 Codepad Panic 041 Panic Alarm Page 190

110 Codepad Fire 046 Fire Alarm Page 191

100 Codepad Medical 045 Medical Alarm Page 191

421 Code Retry Limit Exceeded 042 Access Denied Page 195

602 Test Report - Automatic 044 Test Report Page 197

602 Test Report After Siren Reset 047 Test Report Page 231

307 Sensor Self Test Failure Zone Specific1 – 8

Sensor Watch Page 186

Zone Specific1 - 8

RF Device Supervision Page 187

380 Trouble Zone Specific1 - 8

Sensor Trouble Page 185

300 Fuse Fail 00 System Trouble Page 192

Dialler Reporting Formats 131


EventCode

EventDescription

Point IDNumber Explanation Page

607 Walk Test User Specific Walk Test Mode Page 184

144 TamperZone Specific

1 - 8 Zone Tamper Page 184

384 RF Low BatteryZone Specific

1 - 8 RF Low Battery Page 187

355 RF Receiver Fail 001 RF Receiver Jamming Page 188

002 RF Receiver Tamper Switch Page 188

003 RF Receiver Failure Page 188

573 Bypass Zone Specific1 – 8

Zone Bypass Page 185


24-Hour Zone Bypass Page 185


24-Hour Fire Zone Bypass Page 185

Table 55: Point ID Codes



4+2 Reporting FormatThe 4+2 Express Format will report a Subscriber ID Number followed by an expansion code and thereporting channel number is sent directly after the expansion code.

Subscriber ID Number Expansion Code Channel Number

SSSS A CH

Table 56: Example Reporting In 4+2 Format

New Event 4 + 2 Report Event 4 + 2 Report

Alarm SSSS ACH Alarm Restore SSSS R CH

Trouble SSSS TCH Trouble Restore SSSS TR CH

Bypass SSSS BCH Bypass Restore SSSS BR CH

AC Fail SSSS EAC AC Fail Restore SSSS ER ACR

Low Battery SSSS LLB Low Battery Restore SSSS LBR LB

Opening Report SSSS OU

Closing Report SSSS CU

Test Report SSSS TEO

Program Altered SSSS P0

Duress SSSS DD0

Table 57: 4 + 2 Reporting Format

Code Description Code Description

SSSS Subscriber ID Number R Alarm Restore Code

A Alarm TR Trouble Restore Code

CH Channel Number BR Bypass Restore Code

0 Zero ER AC Fail Restore Code 1st Digit

T Trouble ACRAC Fail Restore Code 2nd

Digit

B Bypass LR Low Battery Restore Code 1st

Digit

E AC Fail Code 1st Digit LBR Low Battery Restore Code 2nd

Digit

AC AC Fail Code 2nd Digit D Duress Code 1st Digit

L Low Battery Code 1st Digit D0 Duress Code 2nd Digit

LB Low Battery Code 2nd Digit P Panic Code 1st Digit

O Open PCH Panic Code 2nd Digit

C Close TP Test Code

U User Number

Table 58: 4 + 2 Transmission Code Descriptions



Basic Pager Reporting FormatBasic Pager Format requires some interpretation of the numbers that appear on the display, however,it is possible to differentiate between 1000 different control panels when a number of control panelsare reporting to the one pager.

How To Set up Receiver 1 For Basic Pager Reporting1. "LOCATION 000 - 015" on page 139 requires the Basic Pager's access telephone number

programmed.

2. “LOCATION 034 – 039” on page 141 requires a Subscriber ID Number programmed.

3. "LOCATION 032" on page 140 requires "Option 5 - Pager Handshake" to be selected.

4. "LOCATION 033" on page 141 requires "Option 5 - Basic Pager Format" to be selected.

How To Set up Receiver 2 For Basic Pager Reporting1. "LOCATION 040 - 055" on page 142 requires the Basic Pager's access telephone number

programmed.

2. “LOCATION 074 – 079” on page 144 requires a Subscriber ID Number programmed.

3. "LOCATION 072" on page 143 requires "Option 5 - Pager Handshake" to be selected.

4. "LOCATION 073" on page 144 requires "Option 5 - Basic Pager Format" to be selected.

Figure 5: Basic Pager Display

The example in "Figure 5: Basic Pager Display" shows that the transmission has come fromSubscriber ID Number 678 and that Zone 2 is in alarm, Zone 3 has been manually isolated, the systemis armed, the panic zone is normal, the AC is connected and there is no fault condition.



Basic Pager Display Information

Subscriber ID NumberThis is the identification number of the control panel and is programmed in “LOCATION 034 – 039”on page 141 for Receiver 1 and “LOCATION 074 – 079” on page 144 for Receiver 2. The pocketpager will only display the last three digits of the Subscriber ID Number.

Zone StatusThe zone status display shows you the status of each zone (1 - 8) of the control panel. The followingtable below describes what each number means when displayed on the zone status display of thepocket pager.

NumberDisplayed Zone Description

0Zone NormalThis indicates that the corresponding zone is in the sealed state.

1AlarmThis indicates that the corresponding zone is unsealed and in alarmcondition.

2

Zone BypassedThis indicates that a system operator has manually isolated thecorresponding zone. Refer to Isolating Zones on page 48 for informationon how to manually isolate a zone(s) prior to arming the system. Refer toZone Status – Bypass Reports on page 185 for more information.

3

Zone Trouble (Software Version 1.02)This indicates that a zone was left unsealed after the end of exit time.Refer to Zone Status – Trouble Reports on page 185 for moreinformation.

Table 59: Zone Status Display Descriptions

System StatusThe system status information is divided up into 4 digits. The first digit of the system status displayindicates whether the system is armed or disarmed (8 = Disarmed / 9 = Armed).

The second digit on the system status display indicates which codepad alarm was triggered by theoperator (0 = No Codepad Alarm / 1 = Codepad Panic or Duress / 2 = Codepad Fire Alarm / 3 =Codepad Medical Alarm). Refer to Figure 4: CP5 LED Codepad Showing Audible Alarm Buttons onpage 47 for more information.

The third digit on the system status display indicates when the AC mains supply has failed (0 = ACmains supply is normal / 1 = AC mains supply has failed or disconnected).

The fourth digit on the system status display indicates when a system fault has occurred at the controlpanel (0 = System Normal – There is no faults / 1 = System Fault – There is a fault registered by thecontrol panel). Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 51 for more information on the types of systemfaults that may occur.



Dialler Information


• Dialler Information

• Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1

• Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1

• Handshake Tone For Receiver 1

• Transmission Format For Receiver 1

• Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1

• Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2

• Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2

• Handshake Tone For Receiver 2

• Transmission Format For Receiver 2

• Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2

• Dialling Format

• Telco Arming Sequence

• Telco Disarming Sequence

• Call Back Telephone Number

• Ring Count

• Telephone Line Fault Options

Dialler InformationThis section outlines the programming information required for the Solution Ultima844/862/880 control panel when communicating with base station receivers. Typically theseparameters specify the telephone numbers to call, the transmission formats, handshake tones andtransmission speeds.

The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 has the ability to report event information from two on-board diallers. The first dialler reports to Receiver 1 and the second dialler reports to Receiver 2.Each dialler has the ability to be programmed with two separate telephone numbers, handshake tone,reporting format type and Subscriber ID Number.

ExampleDialler 1 could be set up to report in Domestic Dialling Format and reports to Receiver 1. Dialler 2could be set up to report to a base station receiver in Contact ID Format only when Dialler 1 wasunsuccessful.

How To Program A Telephone NumberWhen programming the telephone number, if a '0' is required, it must be programmed as a '10'. Eachlocation in the primary, secondary and call back telephone numbers hold one digit of the telephonenumber.

To tell the dialler when the end of the telephone number has been reached, a '0' must be inserted at theend of the telephone number. Therefore the dialling sequence will be terminated when a zero appears.

ExampleTo program the telephone number 9672 1055 as the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1, youwould program the following:

LOCATION 000 - 015

96721 5500000000.

Programming A Four Second Pause In The Telephone NumberTo enter a four-second pause in the dialling sequence, you would need to program the value '13'. Thismay be necessary when the dialler is communicating through an old (slower) telephone exchange orwhere a PABX system is in place.

ExampleTo program the telephone number 02 pause 9672 1055 as the Primary Telephone Number forReceiver 2, you would program the following:

LOCATION 040 - 055

2 96721 5500000.



Table 60: Dialling Digits




LOCATION 000 - 015 0000000000000000

When the control panel requires to send a report, the control panel will dial this number in an attemptto contact the monitoring station or pager etc. If the call is successful, the relevant information will besent and the dialler will return back to the stand-by mode.

If unsuccessful, the dialler will attempt two more times using the primary telephone number forReceiver 1, after which the secondary telephone number for Receiver 1 will be called three times. Ifthe dialling sequence is still unsuccessful, the control panel will then attempt to repeat this proceduredialling the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone number for Receiver 2 ifprogrammed.

This procedure will be repeated only once again (ie. Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm) after tenminutes if none of the first 6 attempts were successful if only the primary telephone number andsecondary telephone number for Receiver 1 has been programmed.

If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone numbers for both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2have been programmed, a maximum of 24 call attempts per alarm will be made.

Contact your monitoring station or pager company for the relevant telephone numbers beforeprogramming these locations.

When Receiver 1 has been set up for domestic reporting, telephone numbers programmed intothese locations will be ignored. Refer to Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 66 whenusing the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 81 whenusing the Master Code function.

Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1

LOCATION 016 - 031 0000000000000000

Refer to the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 for programming information.


Dialler Information 139


Handshake Tone For Receiver 1

LOCATION 032 1

This location sets the type of handshake tone required for Receiver 1 before data transmissions to themonitoring station will begin.

1. HI LO Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in ContactID Format or High Speed DTMF.

2. 1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate inAdemco Lo Speed Format or Domestic Dialling Format.

3. Reserved.

4. No Handshake Tone is not recommended.

5. Pager Handshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in BasicPager Format.

Option Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone

1HI LO Handshake(Contact ID Format) 4 No Handshake

21400 Hz Lo Speed(Ademco Tx At 1900Hz) 5 Pager Handshake

3 2300 Hz (Low Speed Sescoa)

Table 61: Handshake Tones For Receiver 1



Transmission Format For Receiver 1

LOCATION 033 1

Enter the desired transmission format here. This location selects the data format that will be sent tothe base station receiver. This location also allows you to configure the control panel for domestic orbasic pager formats.

Option Transmission Format Option Transmission Format

1 Contact ID 4 Domestic

2 4 + 2 Express 5 Basic Pager

3 FSK (300 Baud) BELL

Table 62: Transmission Formats For Receiver 1

Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1

LOCATION 034 – 039 000000

This number is sent to identify the calling control panel. Enter the desired Subscriber ID Number inthe six locations provided.

For Basic Pager Format, “LOCATION 034 – 036” will be ignored and the first digit of the SubscriberID Number required must start in “LOCATION 037”.

When using Domestic Dialling Format, the number of identification beeps will be the number that isprogrammed in “LOCATION 039”. This gives the ability to identify between 15 different controlpanels calling the same telephone number.

ExampleIf you wish to program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729, you would program the six locations asfollows:

004729




LOCATION 040 - 055 0000000000000000

When the control panel requires to send a report, the control panel will dial this number in an attemptto contact the monitoring station or pager etc. If the call is successful, the relevant information will besent and the dialler will return back to the stand-by mode.

If unsuccessful, the dialler will attempt two more times using the primary telephone number forReceiver 1, after which the secondary telephone number for Receiver 1 will be called three times. Ifthe dialling sequence is still unsuccessful, the control panel will then attempt to repeat this proceduredialling the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone number for Receiver 2 ifprogrammed.

This procedure will be repeated only once again (ie. Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm) after tenminutes if none of the first 6 attempts were successful if only the primary telephone number andsecondary telephone number for Receiver 1 has been programmed.

If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone numbers for both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2have been programmed, a maximum of 24 call attempts per alarm will be made.

Contact your monitoring station or pager company for the relevant telephone numbers beforeprogramming these locations.


Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2

LOCATION 056 - 071 0000000000000000

Refer to the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 on page 142 for more information.




Handshake Tone For Receiver 2

LOCATION 072 1

This location programs the type of handshake tone required for Receiver 2 before data transmissionsto the monitoring station will begin.

1. HI LO Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in ContactID Format or High Speed DTMF.

2. 1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate inAdemco Lo Speed Format or Domestic Dialling Format.

3. Reserved.

4. No Handshake Tone is not recommended.

5. Pager Handshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in BasicPager Format.

Option Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone

1HI LO Handshake(Contact ID Format) 4 No Handshake

21400 Hz Lo Speed(Ademco Tx At 1900Hz) 5 Pager Handshake

3 2300 Hz (Low Speed Sescoa)

Table 63: Handshake Tones For Receiver 2



Transmission Format For Receiver 2

LOCATION 073 1

Enter the desired transmission format here. This location selects the data format that will be sent tothe base station receiver. This location also allows you to configure the control panel for domestic orbasic pager formats.

Option Transmission Format Option Transmission Format

1 Contact ID 4 Domestic

2 4 + 2 Express 5 Basic Pager

3 FSK (300 Baud) BELL

Table 64: Transmission Formats For Receiver 2

Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2

LOCATION 074 – 079 000000

This number is sent to identify the calling control panel. Enter the desired Subscriber ID Number inthe six locations provided.

For Basic Pager Format, “LOCATION 074 – 076” will be ignored and the first digit of the SubscriberID Number required must start in “LOCATION 077”.

When using Domestic Dialling Format, the number of identification beeps will be the number that isprogrammed in “LOCATION 079”. This gives the ability to identify between 15 different controlpanels calling the same telephone number.

ExampleIf you wish to program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729, you would program the six locations asfollows:

004729



Dialling Format

LOCATION 080 1

The method for dialling telephone numbers is entered here. Options 3 and 6 will alternate the diallingsequence between DTMF and Decadic if the call to the base station receiver was unsuccessful.Caution should be exercised when selecting the dialling method.

Only use the Australian method if the control panel is to be connected to the AustralianTelecommunications Network. The International DTMF dialling option should only be used in thosecountries that allow both the caller and the receiver to terminate the phone call. Using the incorrectformat will disable EDM's patent Telephone Anti-Jamming feature.

Option Dialling Format Option Dialling Format

1Australian DTMF(5 Digits/Second) 4

International DTMF(Touch Tone)

2 Australian Decadic 5Reversed Decadic(10 Minus 1)

3Alternating DTMF& Australian Decadic 6

Alternate DTMF& Reversed Decadic

Table 65: Dialling Formats

The alternating sequence is as follows; DTMF - Decadic - DTMF - Decadic - DTMF - Decadic

ReservedLOCATION 081 – 112

00000000000000000000000000000000



Telco Arming SequenceLOCATION 113 – 142

000000000000000000000000000000

These locations allow you to automatically activate call diversion on your telephone when you armthe system in AWAY Mode.

Upon activating the Telco Arming Sequence when arming the system in AWAY Mode, the controlpanel will redirect all calls to your mobile phone, pocket pager or answering service.

Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on Call Forward operations.


0 10 8 8

1 1 9 9

2 2

3 3 * 11

4 4 # 12

5 5 Four Second Pause 13

6 6 Break 14

7 7 15 15


Telco Arming – Call Forward Immediate OnTo turn Call Forward Immediate On:

*21 (Phone Number you want calls to go to) #

ExampleIf you wish to immediately forward all incoming calls to the telephone number 96721055 uponarming the system in AWAY Mode, you would program the following:

2196721 55 000000000000000000

Telco Arming – Call Forward No Answer OnTo turn Call Forward No Answer On:

*61 (Phone Number you want calls to go to) #

ExampleIf you wish to forward all incoming calls to the telephone number 96721055 upon arming the systemin AWAY Mode when there is no answer, you would program the following:

6196721 55 000000000000000000



Telco Disarming Sequence

LOCATION 143 – 158 0000000000000000

These locations allow you to automatically deactivate call diversion on your telephone when youdisarm the system from AWAY Mode.


0 10 8 8

1 1 9 9

2 2

3 3 * 11

4 4 # 12

5 5 Four Second Pause 13

6 6 Break 14

7 7 15 15


Telco Arming – Call Forward Immediate OffTo turn Call Forward Immediate Off:

#21#

ExampleIf you wish to disable the Telco Arming – Call Forward Immediate upon disarming the system fromAWAY Mode, you would program the following:

21 000000000000

Telco Arming – Call Forward No Answer OffTo turn Call Forward No Answer Off:

#61#

ExampleIf you wish to disable the Telco Arming – Call Forward No Answer upon disarming the system fromAWAY Mode, you would program the following:

61 000000000000

Call Back Telephone Number

LOCATION 159 - 174 0000000000000000

This location contains the telephone number that the control panel will dial when Upload/Download is

requested or the number 6 button is held down to initiate a modem call from the control panel toestablish a communications link with the remote computer. The computer must be running the AlarmLink Software (CC816) and will need to be set to "Waiting For An Incoming Call". The Call BackTelephone Number is also required to be programmed if Remote Connect With Call Back Verificationon page 123 is required.

Refer to the section - Alarm Link Operations beginning on page 121 for more information.



Ring Count

LOCATION 175 8

This location sets the number of rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call. Thisshould be set at an acceptable level bearing in mind that one ring = "Ring, Ring - Ring, Ring" and thata ring count of 10 represents approximately 60 seconds. This location only has an effect if remotearming and/or remote Upload/Download via Alarm Link Software has been enabled. If this locationis programmed as 'zero', then the answering of incoming calls will be totally disabled irrespective ofany programmed options.

Answering Machine BypassAnswering machine bypass has been incorporated so that it is possible to make a connection with thecontrol panel for remote arming or Upload/Download when there is an answering machine orfacsimile machine on the same telephone line. There are two different methods of using answeringmachine bypass as explained below. The secondary method should only be used when there is a largeamount of traffic on the line (eg. A home office). It will reduce the chance of the control panelincorrectly answering incoming calls.

1. Programming the ring count as 15 will enable "Answering Machine Bypass" in the primarymode. When calling the control panel, let the phone ring for no more than 4 rings and thenhang up. If you call again within 45 seconds, the control panel will answer the call on the firstring and the connection will be established. This will prevent the answering machine orfacsimile from answering the call. Refer to Option 4 in "LOCATION 177" on page 153 if youwish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed.

2. Programming a 14 as the ring count will enable "Answering Machine Bypass" in the secondarymode. In this mode, when calling the control panel, allow the phone to ring for no more than 2rings and then hang up. Wait a minimum of 8 seconds before calling the control panel again.The control panel will now answer on the first ring. If you do not wait the 8 seconds, thecontrol panel will not answer the call. Refer to Option 4 in "LOCATION 177" on page 153 ifyou wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed.

You should set the ring count on the answering machine or facsimile machine to be higher thantwo rings. Four or six rings would be preferred.

Programming a zero into this location will disable the control panel from answering anincoming call.



Telephone Line Fault Options

LOCATION 176 0

When programming this location, you will notice that there are four options per location. If yourequire options 1, 2, 4 or all of these options, only one number needs to be programmed. This numberis calculated by adding the option bit numbers together. Program a 7 if you require options 1, 2 and 4simultaneously (ie. 1 + 2 + 4 = 7).

Option Description

1 Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails

2 Sound Speaker, Bell and Strobe When System Is Armed

4 Sound Speaker, Bell and Strobe When System Is Disarmed

8 Reserved

Table 68: Telephone Line Fault Options

The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 has the ability to monitor the telephone line. If thetelephone line has been cut or disconnected for more than forty seconds, the control panel willrecognise this and the FAULT indicator will illuminate on the codepad. The FAULT indicator willextinguish once the telephone line has been restored for more than forty seconds.

Option 2 and 4 will not operate unless option 1 has been enabled.

Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line FailsThe FAULT indicator will flash and the codepad buzzer will beep once every minute if the controlpanel detects that the telephone line has been disconnected. Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 53for more information.

Sound Speaker, Bell and Strobe When The System Is ArmedOption 1 in this location will also need to be selected for this option to operate. If the control paneldetects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is armed in AWAY Mode,STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2, the horn speaker, bell and strobe outputs will operate.

Sound Speaker, Bell and Strobe When The System Is DisarmedOption 1 in this location will also need to be selected for this option to operate. If the control paneldetects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is disarmed, the horn speaker,bell and strobe outputs will operate.

Reserved

If Options 1, 2 and 4 have been added together, the horn speaker, bell, strobe and EDMSAToutputs will operate when the system is armed or disarmed.

1

2

4

8



Dialler Options


• Dialler Options 1



• Alarm Link Options

Programming Option BitsWhen programming these locations, you will notice that there are four options per location. You mayselect one, two, three or all four of these options, however, only one number needs to be programmed.This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together.


Option Description








Dialler Options 1

LOCATION 177 9

Option Description





Table 70: Dialler Options 1

Enabled = Allow Dialler Reporting FunctionsIf this option has been selected, the dialler will function for all operations. Upload/Download viaAlarm Link Software (CC816) and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of thissetting.

Disabled = Disable All Dialler Reporting FunctionsIf this option is not selected, the communication dialler will not operate. Upload/Download via AlarmLink Software (CC816) and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of thissetting.

Enable Remote Arming Via The TelephoneIf this option has been selected, you can remotely arm the system via a standard telephone using the

Phone Controller (CC911) or by pressing the * button on your touch tone telephone. Refer toRemote Arming Via The Telephone on page 100 for more information. Forced arming isautomatically assumed when this feature is being used. Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 179 for moreinformation on forced arming.

If the dialler has been disabled, it will have no effect on remote arming via the telephone. Refer toRing Count on page 148 for programming the number of rings before the control panel will answer anincoming call.

Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When ArmedThis option needs to be selected if the answering machine bypass feature is required to operate onlywhen the system has been armed in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. When thesystem is disarmed, the control panel will not answer any incoming calls. This option is beneficial inhigh telephone traffic installations where the control panel could answer an incoming call. Refer toRing Count on page 148 to program answering machine bypass.

Enabled = Use Bell 103 For FSK Format / Disabled = CCITT V21 FormatIf this option is enabled, the control panel will use the transmission frequency BELL 103 at 300 baud.If this option is disabled, the control panel will use the transmission frequency CCITT V21 at 300baud.

8

1

2

4

Dialler Options 153


Dialler Options 2

LOCATION 178 0

Option Description

1 Send Open/Close Reports Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred

2 Send Open/Close Reports When In STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2

4 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete

8 Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 To 55 Seconds


Send Open/Close Reports Only If A Previous Alarm Has OccurredThis option requires Open/Close reports in “LOCATION 345 - 346” to be enabled on page 189 for itto be effective.

An opening report will be sent to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed after analarm has occurred. When the system has been armed, a closing report will be sent. An opening orclosing report will not report again until the system has registered another alarm condition.

If using a Solution Ultima 880 control panel that has been partitioned, an Open/Close report willonly be sent on the area that the alarm had occurred.

If the system is disarmed when an alarm occurs, only a closing report will be sent when thesystem is next armed.

User codes that have their priority set to “Always Send Open/Close” reports will override thisfeature, which means that they will always send open/close reports.

Send Open/Close Reports When In STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2If open and close reports are required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2,this option will need to be selected.

This option requires Open/Close reports in “LOCATION 345 - 346” to be enabled on page 189 for itto be effective. When arming in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2, a “Partial Close” report (ContactID Event Code 456) will be sent.

Delay Siren Until Transmission CompleteIf this option has been selected, the EDMSAT, horn speaker, bell and strobe outputs will not activateuntil the base station receiver has sent a kiss-off back to the control panel after the message has beensent. If multiple messages are sent, the sirens will activate after the last kiss-off has been sent.

However, the EDMSAT, horn speaker, bell and strobe outputs will activate as soon as a codepadpanic, fire and medical alarms have been activated.

Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 - 55 SecondsThe control panel after dialling the monitoring station will wait approximately 30 seconds for receiptof a valid handshake tone. The handshake tone indicates to the control panel that it has reached themonitoring station and can now send its messages. Enabling this option will extend the wait timefrom 30 seconds to 55 seconds.

1

2

4

8



Dialler Options 3

LOCATION 179 0

Option Description

1 Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit/Second

2 Reserved

4 Change Decadic Dialling To 60/40

8 Reserved


Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit/SecondIf this option is not selected, the dialling format – Australian DTMF dials at the rate of 5 digits persecond (ie. 100 ms tone, 100 ms pause, 100 ms tone, 100 ms pause).

If this option has been selected, the dialling format – Australian DTMF dials at the rate of 1 digit persecond (ie. 500 ms tone, 500 ms pause).

Reserved

Change Decadic Dialling To 60/40Some countries have different requirements for decadic dialling. Setting this option will change thedialling characteristics from 65/35 (Australian Standard) to 60/40. This option should only be setwhen the control panel is used in a country that requires decadic dialling as 60/40. This option has noeffect when using DTMF tone dialling.

Reserved

8

4

2

1

Dialler Options 155


Alarm Link Options

LOCATION 180 3

Option Description

1 Enable Upload/Download Via Alarm Link

2 Enable Alarm Link Call Back

4 Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm

8 Use External Modem Module (CC811) For Alarm Link Operations

Table 73: Alarm Link Options

Enable Upload/Download Via Alarm LinkThis option will need to be selected if you require to use the Alarm Link Software (CC816) toremotely program the control panel. The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link Software ifthis option is not selected. Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 122 for more information. Thedirect connect method will always operate irrespective of this option being set.

Enable Alarm Link Call BackIf this option has been selected and a call back telephone number has been programmed, the remoteprogramming computer must be connected to the telephone line that has been programmed in the callback telephone number locations. Refer to “LOCATION 159 - 174” on page 147 to program the callback telephone number.

If this option is not selected, it will allow the installer to connect to their customers control panel fromany remote location when attempting upload/download operations without the need to wait for thecontrol panel to call back to the remote computer, but still allows the ability for the customer to

initiate the modem call from the codepad when requested by holding down the 6 button. Refer toAlarm Link Software on page 122 for more information.

Terminate Alarm Link Connection On AlarmIf the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software (CC816) andan alarm has registered, the “Alarm Link” session will be terminated and the relevant alarm messagewill then be sent to the base station receiver.

If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver, the session will not beterminated. If this option has not been selected and an alarm has registered, the Alarm Link softwarewill prompt the operator with a “Terminate” or “Continue” message.

Use External Modem Module (CC811) For Alarm Link OperationsIf this option has been selected, the control panel will use the external plug-in Modem Module(CC811) for remote programming operations via the Alarm Link Software (CC816). This optionshould only be enabled where the telephone line is susceptible to noise.

1

4

2

8



User Codes


• Installer Code

• User Codes

• User Code Priority

Access CodesThis section describes the access codes that are used to assign privileges and access functions for usercode holders of the system. Two types of user codes exist within the system, the Installer Code andUser Codes. Each of these codes allow specific access and operation of the varied functions of thecontrol panel.

Installer Code

LOCATION 181 - 184 1234

This code is used to access the Installer's Programming Mode and can be between one to four digitslong. However, after the control panel has been powered up, the Installer Code can disarm the systemif it is the first code used. The next time the Installer Code is used, access into Installer'sProgramming Mode will be made.

Installer Code functions are available to allow the installer to carry out various functions during thedisarmed state without the need to remember the customers Master Code. Refer to Installer CodeFunctions on page 62 for more information.

Refer to Programming With The Remote Codepad on page 103 for more information on programmingthe system once Installer’s Programming Mode has been accessed.



User CodesLOCATION 185 - 264

The purpose of user codes is to arm and disarm the system as well as perform other specific functionsas described in Master Code Functions on page 76.

User codes (1–8) can be any length between one to four digits long. Each user code may have adifferent priority level or multiple user codes may have the same priority level. The priority levelcontrols the behaviour of the code, allowing it to arm only, arm and disarm or be a Master Codeholder etc. The priority level of each user code is programmed in the last location of each user codeand can only be programmed by the installer. The Master Code holder does not have any ability tochange the priority level of any user code.

15 15 15 15 0

User Code Priority

There are a total of 16 user codes available that can be changed or deleted at any time by a MasterCode holder, however, user codes 9 – 16 can only be remote radio user codes. Refer to Remote RadioTransmitter Operations on page 56 for more information. Multiple Master Codes can be programmed.Refer to Master Code Functions on page 76 for more information on adding, deleting or changing usercodes.

The priority level for each user code can only be programmed or changed by the installer.

User Code 16 will report when any of the following methods for arming and disarming are used.

1. Arm and disarm via remote radio control equipment connected to the optional RadioKey/Keyswitch Interface (CC813) or the 2 Channel Radio Interface (RE005).

2. Arm and disarm the system via Alarm Link Software (CC816).

3. Arm the system remotely over the telephone.

4. Single button arming in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.

5. Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.

6. Automatic arming in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.

7. Automatic disarming from AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.

User Codes 159


Solution Ultima 844/862 User CodesThe Solution Ultima 844/862 has the ability to have up to eight programmable user codes(User Codes 1 – 8) to operate the system. Refer to System Operations on page 40 for information onthe different methods of arming and disarming the system.

User codes 9 – 16 have been included to allow those systems that require radio remote control viahand held remote Transmitters. Refer to Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on page 56 forinformation on remote operations and adding and deleting remote radio user codes.

Location 185 - 189 Location 190 - 194User Code 1 2 5 8 0 10 User Code 2 15 15 15 15 2

Location 195 - 199 Location 200 - 204 Location 205 - 209User Code 3 15 15 15 15 2 User Code 4 15 15 15 15 2 User Code 5 15 15 15 15 2


Location 225 - 229 Location 230 - 234 Location 235 - 239Radio Code 9 15 15 15 15 2 Radio Code 10 15 15 15 15 2 Radio Code 11 15 15 15 15 2


Location 255 - 259 Location 260 - 264Radio Code 15 15 15 15 15 2 Radio Code 16 15 15 15 15 2

Solution Ultima 880 User CodesThe Solution Ultima 880 has the ability to have up to sixteen programmable user codes (UserCodes 1 – 16). Refer to System Operations on page 40 for information on the different methods ofarming and disarming the system.

However, if you wish to remotely operate the system via hand held remote Transmitters, user codes 9– 16 may be programmed as remote user codes. Refer to Remote Radio Transmitter Operations onpage 56 for information on remote operations and adding and deleting remote radio user codes.









User Code PriorityThere are ten different priority levels that can be allocated to the user code. Each priority level allowsor restricts the functions that different user code holders may perform and can only be changed by theinstaller.

Once user code priority levels 4, 6, 12 or 14 have been programmed to any of the available usercodes, the method of standard isolating will no longer operate. Only those user codes with thepriority level of 4, 6, 12 or 14 will be able to isolate zones using the method code to isolate.

Priority Description Priority Description

0 Arm/Disarm 6Arm/Disarm + Code To Isolate + Open/CloseReport

1 Arm Only 8 Arm/Disarm + Master Code Functions

2 Arm/Disarm + Open/Close Report 10Arm/Disarm + Master Code Functions +Open/Close Report

3 Arm Only + Close Report 12Arm/Disarm + Master Code Functions + Code ToIsolate

4 Arm/Disarm + Code To Isolate 14Arm/Disarm + Master Code Functions + Code ToIsolate + Open/Close Report

Table 74: User Code Priority Levels

Arm and DisarmThis priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system. No opening or closingreports will be sent when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system. However, a usercode with this priority level will only send a closing report only after a previous code that has theability to send an opening report has disarmed the system.

Arm OnlyThis priority level allows the user code holder to arm the system but not disarm it. No closing reportswill be sent when this user code has been used to arm the system. However, a user code with thispriority level will only send a closing report only after a previous code that has the ability to send anopening report has disarmed the system.

Arm and Disarm + Open/Close ReportsThis priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system. When this user code hasbeen used, an opening or closing report will always be sent along with the user number that armed ordisarmed the system.

This option requires Open/Close reports in “LOCATION 345 - 346” to be enabled on page 189 for itto be effective.

Arm Only + Closing ReportsThis priority level allows the user code holder to arm the system but not disarm it. When this usercode has been used, a closing report will always be sent along with the user number that armed thesystem.


0

1

3

2

User Codes 161


Arm and Disarm + Code To IsolateThis priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system. No opening or closingreports will be sent when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system. However, a usercode with this priority level will only send a closing report after a previous code that has the ability tosend an opening report has disarmed the system.

Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method “Code To Isolate” once this priority levelhas been set. Refer to Isolating Zones on page 48 for further information.

Arm and Disarm + Code To Isolate + Open/Close ReportsThis priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system. Opening and closingreports will always be sent when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system. Isolatingof zones will only be allowed by using the method “Code To Isolate” once this priority level has beenset.

This option requires Open/Close reports in “LOCATION 345 - 346” to be enabled on page 189 for itto be effective. Refer to Isolating Zones on page 48 for more information.

Arm and Disarm + Master Code FunctionsThis priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of theMaster Code Functions described on page 76. No opening or closing reports will be sent when thisuser code has been used to arm or disarm the system. However, a user code with this priority levelwill only send a closing report after a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report hasdisarmed the system.

Arm and Disarm + Master Code Functions + Open/Close ReportsThis priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of theMaster Code Functions described on page 76. Opening and closing reports will always be sent whenthis user code has been used to arm or disarm the system.


Arm and Disarm + Master Code Functions + Code To IsolateThis priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of theMaster Code Functions described on page 76. No opening and closing reports will be sent when thisuser code has been used to arm or disarm the system. However, a user code with this priority levelwill only send a closing report after a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report hasdisarmed the system.

Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method “Code To Isolate” once this priority levelhas been set. Refer to Isolating Zones on page 48 for more information.

Arm and Disarm + Master Code Functions + Code To Isolate + Open/CloseReportsThis priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of theMaster Code Functions described on page 76. Opening and closing reports will always be sent whenthis user code has been used to arm or disarm the system. This option requires Open/Close reports in“LOCATION 345 - 346” to be enabled on page 189 for it to be effective. Refer to Isolating Zones onpage 48 for more information.

Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level hasbeen set.

4

6

8

10

12

14



Zone Information


• Day Alarm Zones

• Day Alarm Operation

• EOL Resistor Value

• Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N/C Contacts

• Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N/O Contacts

• Zone Programming




• Zone Types

• Zone Pulse Count

• Zone Pulse Count Handover

• Zone Pulse Count Time

• Zone Options 1

• Keyswitch Zone Options

• Zone Options 2

• Zone Reporting Information

• Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren

• Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler

Day Alarm Zones

LOCATION 265 0

When programming this location, you will notice that there are four options per location. You mayselect one, two, three or all four of these options, however, only one number needs to be programmed.This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together. Program a seven (7) if yourequire options 1, 2 and 4 simultaneously (ie. 1 + 2 + 4 = 7).

Option Day Alarm Zone

1 Zone 1

2 Zone 2

4 Zone 3

8 Zone 4

Table 75: Day Alarm Zones 1 - 4

Day alarm allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed state.Indications are available via any of the programmable outputs including the codepad buzzer. Thisfunction has been expanded to accommodate latching and non-latching day alarm output event types.

When the system has been armed in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2, zones that havebeen programmed as day alarm zones will activate the sirens and dialler just as non day alarm zonesdo. When day alarm has been turned on, it will ignore any zone pulse count settings that have beenprogrammed for that zone (ie. Zone pulse count is only relevant when the system has been armed).

ExampleAn example of a day alarm set up could be the front door of a shop that has a pressure mat orelectronic beam that customers activate as they enter to and from the shop. As the customers walk onthe pressure mat or break the electronic beam, the codepad buzzer will beep.

Day Alarm ResettingAn output that has been programmed for day alarm resetting will operate when a zone programmedfor day alarm has been triggered. The output will reset once the zone has resealed. This will onlyoccur when the system is disarmed. Refer to Output Event Type - Day Alarm Resetting on page 204for more information.

Day Alarm LatchingAn output that has been programmed for day alarm latching will operate when a zone programmed forday alarm has been triggered. The ZONE indicator and the latching output will reset when the button has been pressed. This will only occur when the system is disarmed. Refer to Output EventType - Day Alarm Latching on page 204 for more information.



Day Alarm OperationIf a zone has been programmed for day alarm, the zone can be isolated in the normal way so that itdoes not register as a day alarm zone during the disarmed state. Only zones 1 – 4 can be used as dayalarm zones.

The STAY indicator can be programmed to indicate whether day alarm has been turned on or off.When day alarm has been turned on, the STAY indicator will flash once every three seconds. Refer toOption 8 in “LOCATION 440” on page 231 for more information.

Monitoring of zones 5 – 8 can be achieved by programming an output to mimic a zone. Refer toOutput Event Types on page 202 for more information on all available output types that can beprogrammed.

How To Turn Day Alarm On

1. Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard.

How To Turn Day Alarm Off

1. Hold Down the 4 button until two beeps are heard.

Zone Information 165


EOL Resistor Value

LOCATION 266

Option Resistor Value Option Resistor Value

0 No EOL Resistor 8 6K8 (Blue, Grey, Black, Brown) 1%

1 1K (Brown, Black, Red) 9 10K (Brown, Black, Orange)

2 1K5 (Brown, Green, Red) 10 12K (Brown, Red, Orange)

3 2K2 (Red, Red, Red) 11 22K (Red, Red, Orange)

4 3K3 (Orange, Orange, Black, Brown) 1% 12 Reserved

5 3K9 (Orange, White, Red) 13 Reserved

6 4K7 (Yellow, Violet, Red) 14 Split EOL (3K3/6K8) With Tamper (1K)

7 5K6 (Green, Blue, Red) 15Split EOL (3K3/6K8) 1% Resistors RequiredFour Burglary Zones & Four 24 Hour Zones.

Table 76: EOL Resistor Value

The control panel has the ability to be programmed for different values of EOL (End Of Line)resistors. This is a global parameter and will effect all four zones simultaneously. It gives the abilityto fit the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel into an existing installation withouthaving to change the EOL resistors. This feature also increases the security of the system as there areeleven possible EOL resistor values that can be used. This makes it extremely difficult for anyone totamper with the system.

If split EOL resistors have been selected, the control panel will look for four burglary zones (1-4)consisting of 3K3 EOL resistors and four 24 hour zones (5–8) consisting of 6K8 resistors connected inparallel. The zone 1 terminal on the PCB becomes the terminal for zones 1 and 5.

Caution should be exercised when using split EOL resistors to create eight burglary zones andfour 24-hour zones. This configuration is normally only suitable for N/C contacts. If N/Ocontacts are used, as is the case with most types of smoke detectors, a short circuit on onezone will trigger both zones connected in parallel.

If you require N/O contacts when using split EOL resistors, refer to Connections Of Split EOLResistors Using N/O Contacts on page 168 for more information.



Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N/C Contacts

Figure 6: Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 8 Zones

Connections Of Split EOL Resistors With Tamper Circuit

Figure 7: Connections Of Split EOL With Tamper Circuit



Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N/O Contacts

Figure 8: Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using One N/O Contact

Figure 9: Connections Of Split EOL Using Two N/O Contacts



Zone ProgrammingEach zone contains seven locations that are divided into three groups. The first 3 locations determinehow the zone will operate, the next two locations allow various options for each zone and the last twolocations contain the dialler reporting information of each zone.

Zone Operating InformationZone TypeThis location programs the "Zone Type" required (eg. Delay-1, Instant, 24 Hour etc).

Zone Pulse CountThis location sets how many times the zone must trigger within the time specified in the "Zone PulseCount Time”.

Zone Pulse Count TimeThis parameter sets the time period for the number of times the zone must trigger before activating analarm.

Zone OptionsZone Options 1This location controls the zone (eg. Lockout Siren, Silent etc).

Zone Options 2This location controls the zone (eg. Isolate In STAY Mode 1, Forced Arming Allowed etc).

Zone Reporting InformationZone Report CodeIf you wish the control panel to send zone alarm reports, this location should be programmed as 1. Ifyou do not wish to send zone alarm reports, this location should be programmed as a 0.

Zone Dialler OptionsThis location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select each zone to report onReceiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails or noreporting at all. Select the required dialler option from the table below.

Option Description

0 No Report Required

1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2

4 Receiver 1 and Receiver 2

8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails

Table 77: Zone Dialler Options



Solution Ultima 844 Zones DefaultsLOCATION 267 - 322

Zone 1 Location 267 - 273 Zone 2 Location 274 - 280

2 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1

Zone 3 Location 281 - 287 Zone 4 Location 288 - 294 Zone 5 Location 295 – 301

1 0 0 1 14 1 1 0 0 0 1 14 1 1 12 0 0 1 12 1 1

Zone 6 Location 302 - 308 Zone 7 Location 309 - 315 Zone 8 Location 316 - 322

12 0 0 1 12 1 1 13 0 0 1 12 1 1 9 0 0 1 12 1 1

ZoneType

Zone PulseCount

Zone PulseCount Time

ZoneOption 1

ZoneOption 2

ReportCode

DiallerOptions

Zones 1 – 4 may be programmed as any zone type, whereas zones 5 – 8 may only be programmed toany 24-hour zone type.



2 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1


1 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1 0 0 0 1 14 1 1


0 0 0 1 14 1 1 13 0 0 1 12 1 1 9 0 0 1 12 1 1

ZoneType

Zone PulseCount


ZoneOption 1

ZoneOption 2

ReportCode

DiallerOptions

Zones 1 – 6 may be programmed as any zone type, whereas zones 7 and 8 may only be programmedto any 24-hour zone type.



2 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1


1 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1 0 0 0 1 14 1 1


0 0 0 1 14 1 1 0 0 0 1 14 1 1 9 0 0 1 12 1 1

ZoneType

Zone PulseCount


ZoneOption 1

ZoneOption 2

ReportCode

DiallerOptions

Zones 1 – 8 may be programmed as any zone type.



Zone TypesThere are thirteen different zone types to choose from. Refer to the table below for the different zonetypes available.

Zone Type Description Zone Type Description

0 Instant 8 24 Hour Hold-Up


2 Delay-1 10 Reserved

3 Delay-2 11 Keyswitch

4 Reserved 12 24 Hour Burglary

5 Reserved 13 24 Hour Fire

6 24 Hour Medical 14 Chime Only

7 24 Hour Panic 15 Zone Not Used

Table 78: Zone Types

Instant ZoneAn Instant zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) will sound the sirens and operate the dialler as soon asit registers as unsealed after the exit timer has expired.

If an Instant zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed, a zone restore report will beautomatically sent to the receiving party.

Handover ZoneA Handover zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) will act as an instant zone if it has been triggered byitself. If a handover zone has triggered after a delay zone, the remaining delay time will handoverfrom the delay zone to the handover zone. Handover may be sequential or non-sequential. Thecontrol panel is factory default with sequential handover. Refer to Option 8 in "LOCATION 438" onpage 229 if you require handover to be non-sequential.

If a Handover zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed, a zone restore report will beautomatically sent to the receiving party.

Delay-1 ZoneA Delay-1 zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) will have a delay time determined by the value in EntryTimer 1 on page 216. After entry time has expired, the system will activate into alarm condition.

If a Delay-1 zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed, a zone restore report will beautomatically sent to the receiving party.

Delay-2 ZoneA Delay-2 zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) will have a delay time determined by the value in EntryTimer 2 on page 216. After entry time has expired, the system will activate into alarm condition.

If a Delay-2 zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed, a zone restore report will beautomatically sent to the receiving party.

Reserved

0

2

3

1

4



Reserved

24 Hour MedicalA 24-Hour Medical zone (Contact ID Event Code 100) is always ready to trigger the dialler, hornspeaker, bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state. A medicalreport will be sent to the base station receiver. A 24-Hour Medical zone will not send a restore reportuntil the zone actually restores.

24 Hour PanicA 24-Hour Panic zone (Contact ID Event Code 120) is always ready to trigger the dialler, hornspeaker, bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state. A panicreport will be sent to the base station receiver. A 24-Hour Panic zone will not send a restore reportuntil the zone actually restores.

24 Hour Hold-UpA 24-Hour Hold-Up zone (Contact ID Event Code 122) is always ready to trigger the dialler, hornspeaker, bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state. If yourequire the hold-up alarm to be silent, enable Option 4 – Silent Alarm in Zone Options 1 on page 175.A 24-Hour Hold-Up zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores.

24 Hour TamperA 24-Hour Tamper zone (Contact ID Event Code 137) is always ready to trigger the dialler, hornspeaker, bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state. A 24-HourTamper zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores.

Reserved

Keyswitch ZoneA Keyswitch zone is used when you need to connect a keyswitch to operate the system. Refer toKeyswitch Zone Options on page 177 for selecting options such as momentary, toggle etc. User codenumber 16 will be reported when arming and disarming using this method of operation. Programmingthe polarity level of user code 16 will also effect the operation of the keyswitch zone. Refer to UserCode Priority on page 161 for more information.

24 Hour Burglary ZoneA 24-Hour Burglary zone (Contact ID Event Code 133) is always ready to trigger the dialler, hornspeaker, bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state. A 24-Hour Burglary zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores.

24 Hour Fire ZoneA 24-Hour Fire zone (Contact ID Event Code 110) is always ready to trigger the dialler, horn speaker,bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state. A distinct firesound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition. This fire sound iscompletely different to the burglary sound. A 24-Hour Fire zone will not send a restore report untilthe zone actually restores.

6

5

7

8

9

10

11

12

13



Chime ZoneA Chime zone is not a burglary zone. It can never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler. Its purposeis to map it to a programmable output for an indication of sealed or unsealed state. Refer to OutputEvent Type - Global Chime on page 208.

Chime zones require EOL resistors and they will register at a remote codepad. These zones do noteffect the operation of forced arming.

Zone Not UsedIf a zone is not used, program it as a zone type of 15. This zone will never sound the sirens or triggerthe dialler. An EOL resistor is not required if this zone type is used.

Zone Pulse CountZone pulse count is the number of times a zone must be triggered before the zone registers as analarm. The number of pulses vary between 0 – 15. The zone pulse count value is relative to the timeframe (ie. The number of pulses must be present during a particular time frame. Refer to “Table 80:Zone Pulse Count Times” on page 174 for time frame settings.

Option Number Of Pulses Option Number Of Pulses

0 1 8 8

1 1 9 9

2 2 10 10

3 3 11 11

4 4 12 12

5 5 13 13

6 6 14 14

7 7 15 15

Table 79: Number Of Pulses

Zones that have been programmed with pulse count which are continuously unsealed for 10seconds will activate an alarm condition. 24 Hour Fire zones that have been programmed withpulse count which are continuously unsealed for 30 seconds will activate an alarm condition.

Zone Pulse Count HandoverZone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count time options 8 – 15. Refer toZone Pulse Count Time on page 174 for more information.

Any zone that registers one trigger pulse will automatically increment any other zone pulse countwhich has already registered at least one trigger pulse during its respective time. To enable thisoption, refer to Option 4 in “LOCATION 438" on page 229.

24-Hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones. 24-Hour zones mayhandover pulses to other zones.

14

15



Zone Pulse Count TimeZone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the programmed number of pulses mustregister before an alarm condition is generated.

20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response TimeOption Pulse Count Time Option Pulse Count Time

0 0.5 Seconds 8 20 Seconds

1 1 Second 9 30 Seconds

2 2 Seconds 10 40 Seconds






Table 80: Zone Pulse Count Times

For zone pulse count time, options 0 – 7 have a zone loop response time of 20 ms. For zone pulsecount time, options 8 – 15 have a zone loop response time of 150 ms. Loop response time is thelength of time a zone must be unsealed before it can register as a valid pulse.

Inertia sensors should use options 0 - 7, while PIR detectors should use options 8 – 15.

24-Hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones. 24-Hour zones mayhandover pulses to other zones.



Zone Options 1When programming this location, you will notice that there are four options per location. You mayselect one, two, three or all four of these options, however, only one number needs to be programmed.This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together. Program a seven (7) if yourequire options 1, 2 and 4 simultaneously (ie. 1 + 2 + 4 = 7).

Option Description

1 Lockout Siren/Lockout Dialler

2 Delay Alarm Reporting

4 Silent Alarm

8 Sensor Watch

Table 81: Zone Options 1

Lockout Siren & Lockout DiallerLockout means one activation per arming cycle (ie. A zone programmed for "Lockout" can only causethe sirens or dialler to operate once).

When the system is next armed, the zone can cause the sirens and dialler to operate once more.Restore signals will be sent when the system has been disarmed.

The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel performs lockout different to most othercontrol panels in that only the first zone to trigger an alarm condition will be locked out. All otherzones that are triggered during the same siren run time will reset when the sirens reset. This preventsan intruder from triggering all zones then waiting for the sirens to stop before re-entering thepremises.

ExampleAll zones are programmed for both lockout siren and dialler. Zone 1 is triggered followed by all otherzones causing the sirens to sound and the dialler to report to the base station receiver. Zone 1 will bethe only zone that stops reporting to the base station receiver because of the first zone to trigger islocked out. The remaining zones will continue to report if they are triggered again.

Refer to Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren on page 181 to set the number of times the siren will beallowed to activate before it will be locked out and Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler on page 182to set the number of times the dialler will activate before lockout will take effect.

Delay Alarm ReportingThis option will allow the reporting of alarms on selected zones to be delayed to allow the user toenter their code to cancel alarms that are not required to report. All sounding devices (eg: hornspeaker, strobe and bell outputs) will operate as soon as the alarm condition occurs, but the dialler willnot operate until the delay time in “LOCATION 418 – 419” on page 217 has expired.

1

2



Silent AlarmA zone programmed to be silent will not activate the horn speaker, bell strobe or EDMSAT outputs.The dialler and all other programmable outputs will function as per their particular programming.

Sensor WatchSensor watch gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may have stoppedworking. This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed time period.Refer to "LOCATION 420 - 421" on page 218 for programming sensor watch time.

This value determines how many 24 hour periods a zone may remain continuously sealed before itregisters as a sensor watch fault. The number of hours required to fulfil these 24-hour periods is onlycalculated while the system is in the disarmed state. Every time the system is armed in AWAY Mode,STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2, the sensor watch timer pauses calculating. Sensor watch timer willcontinue calculating the next time the system has been disarmed.

Refer to LOCATION 333 - 334 on page 186 if you wish to disable sensor watch reports.

ExampleIf the sensor watch time is programmed for two days in a situation where a premises is armed fortwelve hours and disarmed for twelve hours each day, it will take four days before a zone can registeras a faulty sensor watch zone.

8

4



Keyswitch Zone OptionsWhen you select a zone to be a keyswitch input, then the following table relates to the optionsavailable to that keyswitch zone. These keyswitch zone options replace Zone Options 1 only for thezones that have been programmed to operate as a keyswitch zone. Keyswitch zones will report as usercode 16.

Option Description

0 Latching Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode

1 Latching Arm In AWAY Mode

2 Latching Disarm From AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2

4 Latching Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1

5 Latching Arm In STAY Mode 1

8 Momentary Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode

9 Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode

10 Momentary Disarm From AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2

12 Momentary Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1

13 Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1

Table 82: Keyswitch Zone Options

Latching Arm and Disarm In AWAY ModeIf this option has been selected, the system will either arm or disarm from AWAY Mode when usingthe latching keyswitch input.

Latching Arm In AWAY ModeIf this option has been selected, the system will arm in AWAY Mode when using the latchingkeyswitch input. Disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option hasbeen selected.

Latching Disarm From AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2If this option has been selected, the system will disarm from AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAYMode 2 when using the latching keyswitch input. Arming the system will not be permitted via thekeyswitch zone if this option has been selected.

Latching Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1If this option has been selected, the system will arm or disarm in STAY Mode 1 when using thelatching keyswitch input. Arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be permittedvia the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected.

Latching Arm In STAY Mode 1If this option has been selected, the system will arm in STAY Mode 1 when using the latchingkeyswitch input. Arming the system in AWAY Mode or disarming the system will not be permittedvia the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected.

Latching Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2If this option has been selected, the system will only disarm from STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2when using the latching keyswitch input. Arming the system in STAY Mode 1, STAY Mode 2 orarming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if thisoption has been selected.

0

1

2

4

5

6



Momentary Arm and Disarm In AWAY ModeIf this option has been selected, the system will either arm or disarm from AWAY Mode when usingthe momentary keyswitch input.

Momentary Arm In AWAY ModeIf this option has been selected, the system will arm in AWAY Mode when using the momentarykeyswitch input. Disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option hasbeen selected.

Momentary Disarm From AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2If this option has been selected, the system will disarm from either AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 orSTAY Mode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch input. Arming the system will not be permittedvia the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected.

Momentary Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1If this option has been selected, the system will arm or disarm in STAY Mode 1 when using themomentary keyswitch input. Arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be permittedvia the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected.

Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1If this option has been selected, the system will arm in STAY Mode 1 when using the momentarykeyswitch input. Arming the system in AWAY Mode or disarming the system will not be permittedvia the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected.

Momentary Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2If this option has been selected, the system will only disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 or STAYMode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch input. Arming the system in STAY Mode 1, STAYMode 2 or arming and disarming the system from AWAY Mode will not be permitted via thekeyswitch zone if this option has been selected.

Figure 10: Wiring Diagram For Keyswitch Zone

Figure 11: Wiring Diagram For Keyswitch Zone Using Split EOL With Tamper (Location 266 = 14)

8

14

13

12

10

9



Zone Options 2When programming this location, you will notice that there are four options per location. You mayselect one, two, three or all four of these options, however, only one number needs to be programmed.This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together. Program a seven (7) if yourequire options 1, 2 and 4 simultaneously (ie. 1 + 2 + 4 = 7).

Option Description

1 Isolate In STAY Mode 1

2 Zone Isolation Allowed

4 Forced Arming Allowed

8 Zone Restore Report

Table 83: Zone Options 2

Isolate In STAY Mode 1If this option has been selected, it will allow the zone to be automatically isolated when the system hasbeen armed in STAY Mode 1.

If this option is not selected, when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1, the zone will activatean alarm when triggered as it normally would in AWAY Mode.

Refer to Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode on page 217 if you wish to program a global entry timefor ALL zones except for 24-hour zone types when armed in STAY Mode 1 (ie. The entry guard timerwill override the delay time programmed for a delay zone). If the entry guard timer has beenprogrammed as "0" each zone will act as per its programmed zone type.

Refer to Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 on page 42 for more information.

Zone Isolation AllowedIf this option has been selected, it will allow a user to isolate the zone before arming the system. Ifthis option is not selected, the zone can not be manually isolated. When a zone has been manuallyisolated, a zone bypass report will be sent. Refer to Isolating Zones on page 48 for more information.

When isolating 24-hour zone types, the 24-hour zone will automatically send a zone bypass report atthe time the zone is selected to be isolated. All non 24-hour zone types will only send a bypass reportat the time the system is armed.

If you require the system not to report zone bypass reports, program “LOCATION 329 - 330” on page185 as zeros.

Forced Arming AllowedIf this option has been selected, it will allow the system to be armed with the zone unsealed. If thisoption is not selected, the system will not allow the user code holder to arm the system until the zonein question has been sealed or manually isolated. Refer to Isolating Zones on page 48 for moreinformation.

Zone Restore ReportIf this option has been selected, the zone will send restore reports as soon as the zone has restored. Ifthis option has not been selected, the zone will not send restore reports after the zone has restored.

If a non 24-hour zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed, the system willautomatically send a zone restore report for that zone. All 24-hour zone types will only a send zonerestore report at the time the zone has restored.

1

2

4

8



Zone Reporting Information

Zone Report CodeIf you wish the control panel to send zone alarm reports, this location should be programmed as 1. Ifyou do not wish to send zone alarm reports, this location should be programmed as a 0.

Zone Dialler OptionsThis location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select each zone to report onReceiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails or noreporting at all. Select the required dialler option from the table below.

Option Description


1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2






Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren

LOCATION 323 3

Location Description

323 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren (0 - 15)

Table 85: Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Location

This location determines the number of times the sirens can be triggered before any lockout optionswill take effect. A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout siren for this location to beeffective. Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 175 to program zones for lockout siren.

Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter. This meansalarms such as codepad panic, access denied and any other system alarms will not effect the swingershutdown count.

While the sirens are operating, the counter for the sirens is only incremented by the first zone thatcauses the alarm. Any other zones that are triggered during siren run time will not effect the counter.While the dialler is on line, its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm.Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter.

When the swinger shutdown count (As programmed in “LOCATION 323”) has been reached, allzones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings.

ExampleAll eight zones have been programmed for lockout siren with a swinger shutdown count of 3. If zone1 triggers an alarm, the swinger shutdown count will decrement by one after the end of siren run timeto a swinger shutdown count of 2.

After the siren run time has reset from the previous alarm, zone 2 triggers an alarm and reactivates thesirens. After the sirens have reset, the swinger shutdown count has decremented again from 2 to 1.

If zone 3 also triggers an alarm after the sirens have reset from zone 2, the swinger shutdown counthas decremented from 1 to 0, therefore locking out all three zones from sounding the sirens again untilthe system has been reset.

However, at this point in time, the swinger shutdown count for sirens has again a lockout count of 3and the process of swinger shutdown for the remaining zones begin again until all zones have beenlocked out.

The Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren is global to both Area 1 and Area 2 when using aSolution Ultima 880 control panel that has been partitioned.



Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler

LOCATION 324 6


324 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler (0-15)

Table 86: Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler Location

This location determines the number of times the dialler can be triggered before any lockout optionswill take effect. A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout dialler for this location tobe effective. Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 175 to program zones for lockout dialler.

Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter. This meansalarms such as codepad panic, code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swingershutdown count.

While the sirens are operating, the counter for the dialler is only incremented by the first zone thatcauses the alarm. Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter.While the dialler is on line, its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm.Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter.

When the swinger shutdown count (As programmed in "LOCATION 324") has been reached, allzones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings.

If "Lockout Dialler" has been enabled for any zone, the last restore signal will not be sent untilthe system or area (If partitioned) has been disarmed.

The Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler is global to both Area 1 and Area 2 when using aSolution Ultima 880 control panel that has been partitioned.

ExampleAll eight zones have been programmed for lockout dialler with a swinger shutdown count of 6. Ifzone 1 triggers an alarm, the swinger shutdown count will decrement by one at the time the controlpanel makes the call to a swinger shutdown count of 5.

If zone 1 re-triggers the dialler, the swinger shutdown count will be decremented by one to a swingershutdown count of 4. If zone 1 re-triggers the dialler 3 more times, the swinger shutdown count willbe 1.

If zone 2 triggers an alarm, the swinger shutdown count will be decremented by one to a swingershutdown count of zero, therefore, locking out zone 2 from activating the dialler again until the systemhas been reset. However, at this point in time, the swinger shutdown count for the dialler has again alockout count of 6 and the process of swinger shutdown for the remaining zones including zone 1begin again until all zones have been locked out.



System Reporting Information

Reporting InformationThis section covers features that are involved with the basic house keeping of the system. Thisincludes monitoring of the zones - whether they are isolated from the system or more importantly thatthey are actually operating, the status of both the AC mains and DC power to the system and codepadgenerated alarms activated by the user.

Zone Status – Zone Tamper Report

LOCATION 325 - 326 00


325 Zone Tamper Report

326 Zone Tamper Restore Report

Table 87: Zone Status – Zone Tamper Report Locations

A “Zone Tamper” report (Contact ID Event Code 144) will be sent when the zone loop using splitEOL resistors (3K3/6K8) with tamper (1K) becomes open circuit. Refer to Option 14 in LOCATION266 on page 166 for more information.

Zone Status – Walk Test Report

LOCATION 327 - 328 00


327 Walk Test Report

328 Walk Test Restore Report

Table 88: Zone Status – Walk Test Report Locations

A “Walk Test” report (Contact ID Event Code 607) will be sent when either the installer or MasterCode holder enters walk test mode. Refer to Walk Test Mode on page 74 when using the InstallerCode or Walk Test Mode on page 90 when using the Master Code for more information.



Zone Status – Bypass Reports

LOCATION 329 - 330 98


329 Zone Bypass Report

330 Zone Bypass Restore Report

Table 89: Zone Status - Bypass Report Locations

A zone is bypassed when it is manually isolated. Refer to Isolating Zones on page 48 for informationon isolating zones. A "Zone Bypass" report (Contact ID Event Code 573) will be sent at the end ofexit time for any zone that has been manually isolated. 24-hour zones will send a “Zone Bypass”report at the time the zone has been selected to be isolated.

A "Zone Bypass Restore" report will be sent when the system has been disarmed. All bypassed zonesare automatically cleared when the system has been disarmed.

The bypass code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4+2 Formats. It has no effect on ContactID Format as a zone bypass will always be reported on event code 570.

If "Zone Bypass" reports are not required, program "LOCATION 329 - 330" with a zero.

Contact ID Event Code 572 will report when any 24-Hour burglary zones have been manuallybypassed. Contact ID Event Code 571 will report when any 24-Hour fire zones have been

manually Isolated.

Zone Status – Trouble Reports

LOCATION 331 – 332 23


331 Zone Trouble Report

332 Zone Trouble Restore Report

Table 90: Zone Status - Trouble Report Locations

A zone is in trouble when it is unsealed at the end of exit time. A "Sensor Trouble" report (Contact IDEvent Code 380) will be sent to indicate that one or more zones have been automatically isolated bythe system. 24-hour zones that are unsealed at the end of exit time will not send a "Sensor Trouble"report as the restore for that zone is still outstanding.

A "Sensor Trouble" restore report will be sent for burglary zones when the zone reseals or when thesystem is next disarmed (which ever happens first). A 24-hour zone will only send a restore signalwhen it has resealed.

The trouble code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4+2 Format. It has no effect on ContactID Format as a "Sensor Trouble" report will always be reported on event code 380.

If "Sensor Trouble" reports are not required, program "LOCATION 331 – 332" with a zero.

System Reporting Information 185


Zone Status – Sensor Watch Reports

LOCATION 333 - 334 45


333 Sensor Watch Report

334 Sensor Watch Restore Report

Table 91: Zone Status – Sensor Watch Report Locations

A "Self Test Failure" report (Contact ID Event Code 307) will be sent to the base station receiverwhen a zone has not been triggered during the Sensor Watch Time programmed in "LOCATION 420- 421" on page 218. This report will continue to be sent (according to the frequency of the sensorwatch time) until the fault has been rectified.

To clear the fault and stop any further reporting, the zone that registered the fault must be unsealedand resealed again. Refer to "LOCATION 420 - 421" on page 218 to set the number of days a zonemay remain sealed before registering as a fault. Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 175 to programzones to be monitored by the sensor watch feature.

If "Self Test Failure" reports are not required, program "LOCATION 333 - 334" with a zero.

Zone Status – Alarm Restore Code

LOCATION 335

If you wish the control panel to send zone alarm restore reports, this location should be programmedas 14. If you do not wish to send zone restore reports, this location should be programmed as a zero.

“LOCATION 336” will be ignored when programming the alarm restore code and is global for allzones. A zone restore report will only report to the receiving party that the zone has been allocated to(eg: Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 etc).

Zone Status Reporting Options

LOCATION 336 1

Option Description


1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2



Table 92: Zone Status Reporting Options Location

This location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select whether the zone statusreports will report on, Receiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2 only whenReceiver 1 fails or no reporting at all.

When using partitioned Solution Ultima 880 control panels, this location will be ignored ifOption 1 – Lock Area 1 to Receiver 1 & Lock Area 2 to Receiver 2 in “LOCATION 445” on page242 has been programmed.



RF Supervision Time

LOCATION 337 0


337 Increments Of 6 Hours (0 – 90 Hours)

Table 93: Zone Status – RF Supervision Time Location

A "RF Supervision Failure" report (Contact ID Event Code 307) will be sent to the base stationreceiver when the wireless receiver has not received a signal from any RF wireless zone during the RFSupervision Time. This report will continue to be sent (according to the frequency of the RFSupervision Time) until the fault has been rectified.

To clear the fault and stop any further reporting, the zone that registered the fault must be unsealedand resealed again. Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 53 for more information.

If "RF Supervision Time" reports are not required, program "LOCATION 337" with a zero.

RF Low Battery Report

LOCATION 338 - 339 68


338 RF Low Battery Report

339 RF Low Battery Restore Report

Table 94: RF Low Battery Report Locations

A “RF Low Battery” report (Contact ID Event Code 384) will be sent to the base station receiverwhen the battery voltage on a wireless zone falls below approximately 2.4V DC. An “RF LowBattery Restore” report will be sent on the first valid signal after the battery has been replaced.



RF Receiver Trouble Report

LOCATION 340 - 341 79


340 RF Receiver Trouble Report (Tens Digit)

341 RF Receiver Trouble Report (Units Digit)

Table 95: RF Receiver Trouble Report Locations

A “RF Receiver Trouble” report (Contact ID Event Code 355) will be sent to the base station receiverwhen the RF receiver registers one of the following events:

RF Signal Jamming - Point ID Code 001RF Receiver Tamper Switch - Point ID Code 002RF Receiver Failure - Point ID Code 003.

RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report

LOCATION 342 - 343 7


342 RF Receiver Trouble Report (Tens Digit)

343 RF Receiver Trouble Report (Units Digit)

Table 96: RF Receiver Trouble Report Locations

A “RF Receiver Trouble Restore” report will be sent to the base station receiver when the RF receiverno longer registers RF Signal Jamming, RF Receiver Tamper Switch or RF Receiver Failure.

RF Dialler Options

LOCATION 344 1

Option Description


1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2



Table 97: Zone Status Reporting Options Location

This location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select whether the zone statusreports will report on, Receiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2 only whenReceiver 1 fails or no reporting at all.



Open/Close Reports

LOCATION 345 - 346


345 Opening Report

346 Closing Report

Table 98: Open/Close Reporting Locations

An "Opening" report (Contact ID Event Code 401) will be sent to the base station receiver when thesystem has been disarmed from AWAY Mode. A "Closing" report (Contact ID Event Code 401) issent at the end of exit time when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode.

If an expanded format has been selected, this code will be used as the expansion code and the usernumber that armed or disarmed the system will follow in the same transmission.

Refer to Option 2 in "LOCATION 178" on page 154 for programming "Open/Close" reports in STAYMode. To program "Open/Close" reports only after a previous alarm, refer to Option 1 in"LOCATION 178" on page 154.

If you do not require "Open/Close" reports, program "LOCATION 345 - 346" with zero.

Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have been partitioned will send Open/Close reports witha Contact ID Event Code 402

Open/Close Reporting Options

LOCATION 347 1

Option Description


1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2



Table 99: Open/Close Reporting Options Location

This location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select whether the open/closereports will report on Receiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2 only whenReceiver 1 fails or no reporting at all.



Codepad Duress Report

LOCATION 348 6


348 Codepad Duress Report

Table 100: Codepad Duress Report Location

A "Duress" report (Contact ID Event Code 121) will be sent to the base station receiver when the 9button is added to the end of any valid user code being used to disarm the system. This alarm willalways be silent. A duress alarm can be triggered during exit time (ie. If the system has been armed

and then disarmed by adding the 9 button to the end of the user code before exit time has expired, a

"Duress" report will be sent). Adding 9 to the end of a user code when arming the system will notcause a duress alarm.

Refer to Option 2 in “LOCATION 442” on page 233 if you wish to add the 3 button to the end ofthe user code being used to disarm the system.

Restore reports are not sent for this event. If a "Duress" report is not required, program"LOCATION 348" with a zero.

Codepad Panic Report



349 Codepad Panic Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

350 Codepad Panic Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 101: Codepad Panic Report Locations

A "Panic Alarm" report (Contact ID Event Code 120) will be sent to the base station receiver when

either the two outside buttons 1 and 3 or and are pressed simultaneously. This is anaudible alarm. Refer to Option 1 in "LOCATION 437" on page 228 if you require codepad panic tobe silent.

Restore reports are not sent for this event. If a "Panic" report is not required, program"LOCATION 349 - 350" with a zero.



Codepad Fire Report



351 Codepad Fire Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

352 Codepad Fire Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 102: Codepad Fire Report Locations

A "Fire Alarm" report (Contact ID Event Code 110) will be sent to the base station receiver when the

4 and 6 buttons are pressed simultaneously. This is an audible alarm. Refer to Option 2 in"LOCATION 437" on page 228 if you require codepad fire to be silent. A distinct fire sound isemitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition. The fire sound is differentto the burglary sound.

Restore reports are not sent for this event. If a "Fire" report is not required, program"LOCATION 351 - 352" with a zero.

Codepad Medical Report



353 Codepad Medical Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

354 Codepad Medical Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 103: Codepad Medical Report Locations

A "Medical" report (Contact ID Event Code 100) will be sent to the base station receiver when the 7and 9 buttons are pressed simultaneously. This is an audible alarm. Refer to Option 4 in"LOCATION 437" on page 228 if you require codepad medical to be silent.

Restore reports are not sent for this event. If a "Medical" report is not required, program"LOCATION 353 - 354" with a zero.



Codepad Reporting Options

LOCATION 355 1

Option Description


1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2



Table 104: Codepad Reporting Options Location

This location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select whether the codepadreporting options will report on Receiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2only when Receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all.

System Status – Fuse Fail Report



356 System Status – Fuse Fail Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

357 System Status – Fuse Fail Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 105: System Status – Fuse Fail Report Locations

A system trouble report (Contact ID Event Code 300) will be sent when either the codepad fuse or theaccessories fuse has blown. A delay of approximately 10 seconds will be between from when the fusehas blown and when the system will report the event.

System Status – Fuse Fail Restore Report



358 System Status – Fuse Fail Restore Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

359 System Status – Fuse Fail Restore Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 106: System Status – Fuse Fail Restore Report Locations

A system trouble restore report (Contact ID Event Code 300) will be sent when either the codepadfuse or the accessories fuse has been replaced. A delay of approximately 10 seconds will be betweenfrom when the fuse has been replaced and when the system will report the event.



System Status – AC Fail Report



360 System Status – AC Fail Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

361 System Status – AC Fail Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 107: System Status – AC Fail Report Locations

An "AC Loss" report (Contact ID Event Code 301) will be sent to the base station receiver when theAC mains supply has been disconnected continuously for two minutes. If you require an "AC Loss"report to be sent to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for 1hour, enable Option 1 in "LOCATION 438" on page 229. If you wish to ignore AC fail, enableOption 2 in "LOCATION 438" on page 229.

If an "AC Loss" report is not required, program "LOCATION 360 - 361" with a zero.

System Status – AC Fail Restore Report



362 System Status – AC Fail Restore Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

363 System Status – AC Fail Restore Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 108: System Status – AC Fail Restore Report Locations

A restore signal will be sent when the AC mains supply has been restored continuously for more thantwo minutes.

If an "AC Loss” restore report is not required, program "LOCATION 362 - 363" with a zero.



System Status - Low Battery Report



364 System Status – Low Battery Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

365 System Status – Low Battery Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 109: System Status – Low Battery Report Locations

A "Battery Test Failure" report (Contact ID Event Code 309) will be sent to the base station receiverwhen the systems battery voltage falls below 10.5 volts or when a dynamic battery test detects a lowcapacity battery.

A dynamic battery test is performed every time the system has been armed as well as every four hoursfrom power up of the control panel. Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 53 for more information.

If a "Low Battery" report is not required, program "LOCATION 364 - 365" with a zero.

Outputs 1 – 4 will NOT operate whilst the control panel detects a low battery.

System Status - Low Battery Restore Report



366 System Status – Low Battery Restore Report (Tens Digit)

367 System Status – Low Battery Restore Report (Units Digit)

Table 110: System Status – Low Battery Restore Report Locations

A "Low Battery” restore report will be sent if the back up battery has been restored the next time thesystem has been armed, or when the next dynamic battery test reports the battery test is OK.

If a "Low Battery Restore" report is not required, program "LOCATION 366 - 367" with a zero.



System Status - Access Denied

LOCATION 368 - 370 6 7


368 Code Retries (0 – 15)

369 System Status – Access Denied Reporting Code (Tens Digit)

370 System Status – Access Denied Reporting Code (Units Digit)

Table 111: System Status – Access Denied Locations

An "Access Denied" report (Contact ID Event Code 421) will be sent to the base stationreceiver when the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in"LOCATION 368". This is an audible alarm. Refer to Option 8 in "LOCATION 437" on page228 if you require this alarm to be silent.

Restore signals for this event are not sent. If an "Access Denied" report is not required,program "LOCATION 369 - 370" with a zero.

Code RetriesCode retries restricts the amount of times an invalid user code can be used in an attempt to operate thesystem. This location sets the number of incorrect code attempts that will cause an alarm condition.When the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in this location, thesystem will carry out the following;

1. Activate the sirens, internal screamers and strobes connected to the control panel. Refer toOption 8 in “LOCATION 437” on page 228 if you require access denied to be silent.

2. Shutdown all codepads that are connected to the control panel and lock them out for the timeperiod programmed in “LOCATION 422” on page 218.

3. Send an “Access Denied” (Contact ID Event Code 421) report to the base station receiver.

Each time the system is armed or disarmed, the counter will be reset. The number of attempts can beanywhere between 1-15. If you program a zero into “LOCATION 368”, the code attempts areunlimited and neither of the three points listed above will take place. This function works when thesystem is in the armed or disarmed state.



System Status Reporting Options

LOCATION 371 1

Option Description


1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2



Table 112: System Status Reporting Options Location

This location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select whether the system statusreporting options will report on Receiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2only when Receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all.



Test Reporting Time

LOCATION 372 - 378 0000 71 0


372 Actual Hour Of The Day (Tens Digit)

373 Actual Hour Of The Day (Units Digit)

374 Actual Minute Of The Day (Tens Digit)

375 Actual Minute Of The Day (Units Digit)

376 Test Report Code (Tens Digit)

377 Test Report Code (Units Digit)

378 Repeat Interval In Days

Table 113: Test Reporting Time Locations

A "Test" report (Contact ID Event Code 602) is a specific signal that is sent to the base stationreceiver and is normally used to test the dialling and reporting functions of the control panel. Testreports will not be sent if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000.

When programming test reports, the control panel needs to know the hour and minute of the day thereport is required, as well as how often to send the report. Test reports are reported on a daily basisranging from every day to every fifteen days. Refer to "Set The Number Of Days Until The First TestReport" on page 65 to set the first test report if required.

If you do not require "Test" reports, program the repeat interval in "LOCATION 378" as zero.

ExampleIf you wish to send test reports once every seven days at 11:35 PM, you would program “LOCATION372 - 378” as follows:

2335 71 7

Test Reporting Dialler Options

LOCATION 379 1

Option Description


1 Receiver 1

2 Receiver 2



Table 114: Test Reporting Options Location

This location is factory default to report only to Receiver 1. You can select whether the test reportingoptions will report on Receiver 1, Receiver 2, both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, Receiver 2 only whenReceiver 1 fails or no reporting at all.



Programmable Outputs


• Outputs

• Output Defaults

• Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer

• Output Event Types

• Output Polarity

• Timing Of Outputs

• Pulsing Polarities

• One Shot Polarities

OutputsThe Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel has four fully programmable outputs on themain PCB and one other programmable output that operates the codepad buzzer. These four outputsare factory default to operate a horn speaker, fire alarm verification, strobe and an internal screamer.

Outputs 1 – 4 will NOT operate whilst the control panel detects a low battery.

Programmable outputs require four parameters to be programmed in order to operate correctly.

Event Type: When To Operate

Polarity: How To Operate

Time Base: How Long To Operate For

Time Multiplier: How Often To Operate

EventType

Polarity TimeBase

TimeMultiplier

When To Operate Is selected from the output event types listed on page 202. Each digitshould be entered into the two corresponding locations for the outputevent type required.

How To Operate Is selected from "Table 116: Event Type Polarities” on page 211. Thisdetermines whether the output remains operating for the duration ofthe event, pulses for the duration, operates once only (one shot) orlatches on.

How Long To Operate For Is determined by a time base and a multiplier. Refer to "Timing OfOutputs" on page 213 for further information.

How Often To Operate ForIs determined by a time base and a multiplier. Refer to "Timing OfOutputs" on page 213 for further information.

Output Defaults

Default For HornSpeaker

Default ForFire Alarm Verification

Default For Strobe(Reset In 8 Hrs)

Location 380 - 385 Location 386 - 391 Location 392 - 397Output 1 1 14 0 0 0 0 Output 2 2 7 10 2 1 5 Strobe 2 0 6 4 0 8

Location 398 – 403 Location 404 – 409Relay 1 15 1 0 0 0 Codepad 0 13 2 1 0 1

Default ForSirens Running

Default For Entry/ExitWarning + Day Alarm

Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier



Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad BuzzerMultiple output event types can be directed to the codepad buzzer so that it may be used to indicateany number of events.

This is achieved by selecting an output and programming it for the required output event type. Whenyou are satisfied that the output is functioning correctly, change the first digit of the output event type(ie. The tens digit) by adding the value 8.

Example

30 Communications FailureThis event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the basestation receiver. The output will reset when the first "Kiss-Off" is received. This outputevent type is not applicable for domestic reporting.

To redirect the above output event type to operate a codepad buzzer, program the outputevent type as below:

0 Communications FailureThis event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the basestation receiver. The output will reset when the first "Kiss-Off" is received. This outputevent type is not applicable for domestic reporting.

The codepad buzzer will now operate instead of the output that has been programmed. Theoutput is no longer functional and cannot be used for any other output event type.

Programmable Outputs 201


Output Event TypesThere are approximately seventy-five different output event types to choose from. Two numbersdesignate each output event type. These two numbers need to be programmed into the appropriatelocations of the output being used to indicate when the output should operate.

All reset times are in reference to polarity 1 and 8. Reset times will vary depending on thepolarity used.

00 EDMSAT - Satellite Siren (Output 1 Only)This output controls all functions of an EDMSAT satellite siren (SS914). The option ofspeaker indication beeps will not operate via the EDMSAT for remote operations. Nopolarity is required to be programmed for this output event type.

01 System ArmedThis output will operate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 orSTAY Mode 2. The output will reset when the system has been disarmed. If the systemhas been partitioned, this event will operate when both areas have been armed in AWAYMode or STAY Mode 1.

02 System DisarmedThis output will operate when the system is in the disarmed state. The output will reset assoon as the system becomes armed. If the system has been partitioned, this event willoperate when both areas have been disarmed.

03 Armed In STAY ModeThis output will operate when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode2. The output will reset when the system is disarmed. If the system has been partitioned,this event will operate when either area has been armed in STAY Mode 1.

04 Armed In AWAY ModeThis output will operate when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode. The outputwill reset when the system is disarmed. If the system has been partitioned, this event willoperate when either area has been armed in AWAY Mode.

05 Auto Arm Pre-Arming Alert TimeThis output will operate during the time period before the control panel will automaticallyarm in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1. Once the control panel has automatically armed inAWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1, the output will reset. To program the pre-arming alerttime, refer to “LOCATION 425” on page 220.

06 Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry WarningThis output will operate during exit time when the control panel has been armed in AWAYMode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 if all zones are sealed. This output event type willreset once exit time has expired.

The next time this output event type will operate will be during entry time and will resetonce entry time has expired or the system has been disarmed. This output event type willalso operate if a zone has triggered when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 orSTAY Mode 2 only if the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed in"LOCATION 416 - 417" on page 217.



07 Exit WarningThis output operates during exit time when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode,STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The output will reset once exit time has expired.

08 Exit Warning FinishedThis output operates when the exit time has expired when the system has been armed inAWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The output will reset when the systemhas been disarmed.

09 Kiss-Off After Exit TimeThis output will operate after the first successful transmission to the base station receiverwhen exit time has expired. The output will reset when the system has been disarmed.

0 Entry WarningThis output will operate when either Entry Timer 1, Entry Timer 2 or Entry Guard TimerFor STAY Mode are operating. The output will reset when the entry time expires.

0 Entry Warning + Day Alarm ResettingThis output combines both Entry Warning and Day Alarm Resetting so that either of thesetwo events will activate the output.

If the output has been triggered by either Entry Timer 1, Entry Timer 2, or Entry GuardTimer For STAY Mode, the output will reset once the entry timer has expired or the systemhas been disarmed.

If a zone programmed for day alarm has triggered during the disarmed state, the output willreset when the zone has resealed. Day alarm may be turned on and off by holding down the

4 button. Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 164 for programming zones to operate forday alarm.

0 Exit Warning + Entry Warning + Day Alarm ResettingThis output combines exit warning, entry warning and day alarm so that any of these threeevents will activate the output.

This output will activate once the system has been armed in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1or STAY Mode 2 irrespective of any zones being sealed or unsealed until exit time expires.

The next time the output will activate will be during entry time and will reset once entrytime has expired or the system has been disarmed. This output will also operate when theEntry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is timing.

If a zone programmed for day alarm has triggered during the disarmed state, the output willreset when the zone has resealed. Day alarm may be turned on and off by holding down the

4 button. Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 164 for programming zones to operate forday alarm.

0 Day Alarm ResettingThis output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered. Theoutput will reset when the day alarm zone has resealed. Day alarm may be turned on and

off by holding down the 4 button. Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 164 forprogramming zones to operate for day alarm.



0 Day Alarm LatchingThis output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered. Theoutput will reset when the button has been pressed. Day alarm may be turned on and

off by holding down the 4 button. Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 164 forprogramming zones to operate for day alarm.

If the control panel has been partitioned, pressing the button on a CP5 AreaAddressble codepad other than the zone was allocated, or pressing the button on aCP5 Master Partitioned Codepad will not reset the output. You can only reset this outputon the area codepad that the zone has been allocated to.

10 Day Alarm EnabledThis output will operate as soon as day alarm has been enabled. The output will reset whenday alarm has been turned off.

Day alarm can be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button. Three beeps indicatesthat day alarm has been turned on, two beeps indicates that day alarm has been turned off.Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 164 for programming zones to operate for day alarm.

11 Telephone Line FailThis output will operate when the in-built telephone line fault module detects that thetelephone line has been disconnected for a period of approximately 40 seconds. The outputwill reset once the telephone line has been restored continuously for more than 40 seconds.This output will not operate unless Option 1 in “LOCATION 176” on page 149 has beenenabled.

12 Kiss-Off ReceivedThis output will operate after the control panel has successfully sent to the receiving party.

13 Fuse FailThis output will operate when either the 1 Amp codepad fuse or the 1 Amp accessories fusefails. The output will reset once the faulty fuse has been replaced.

14 AC FailThis output will operate as soon as the AC mains has failed. The output will reset as soonas the AC mains has restored. This output will operate regardless of Option 2 in"LOCATION 438" on page 229 being set.

15 Low BatteryThis output will operate when a dynamic battery test detects that the battery has failed orthe battery voltage has fallen below 10.5 volts. The dynamic battery test is performedevery four hours from when the system has been powered up or every time the system hasbeen armed in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.

This output will reset only after a dynamic battery test reports the backup battery hasrestored.

16 Horn Speaker Monitor FailIf Option 2 – Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker in "LOCATION 436" on page 227 hasbeen selected, this output will operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected. Theoutput will reset when the horn speaker has been reconnected.



17 Sensor Watch AlarmThis output will operate when the sensor watch count has been reached. Refer to ZoneOptions 1 on page 175 for more information on programming zones for sensor watch.Refer to "LOCATION 420 - 421" on page 218 for setting how many days before a zone canregister as a faulty sensor watch zone.

18 Codepad Medical Alarm

This output will operate when pressing the 7 and 9 buttons simultaneously on theremote codepad has activated a codepad medical alarm. This output will reset once a validuser code has been entered at the remote codepad.

19 Codepad Fire AlarmThis output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been activated by pressing the

4 and 6 buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously. This output will reset once avalid user code has been entered at the remote codepad.

1 Codepad Panic AlarmThis output will operate when a codepad panic alarm (audible or silent) has been activated

by pressing the 1 and 3 buttons or the and buttons on the remote codepadsimultaneously. This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered at theremote codepad.

1 Codepad Duress Alarm

This output will operate when a duress alarm has been activated by adding a 9 to the endof the user code being used to disarm the system. This output will reset the next time thesystem has been armed.

1 Codepad Tamper – Access DeniedThis output will operate when the wrong code has been entered more times than allowed.Refer to "LOCATION 368 - 370" on page 195 for setting the number of incorrect attemptsthat may be allowed. This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered.

1 Speaker BeepsThis output will function during all remote radio/keyswitch operations allowing you to fit a12V DC buzzer or light to provide status indication for the end user. Refer to the tablebelow for the identification beeps and their meanings.

No Of Beeps System Status

1 System Disarmed


3 System Armed In STAY Mode 1

Table 115: Horn Speaker Beeps

1 Horn Speaker (Output 1 Only)This output will operate only on Output 1 and should be programmed whenever an 8-ohmhorn speaker is required. A maximum of two horn speakers may be used. Refer to“LOCATION 423” on page 219 for setting the siren run time and “LOCATION 424” onpage 219 for setting the siren sound rate.

If you require monitoring of the horn speaker, refer to Option 2 in “LOCATION 436” onpage 227.



1 Sirens RunningThis output will operate for the duration of the siren run time programmed in "LOCATION423" on page 219. When the sirens have been activated, this output will reset once thesiren run time has expired. The relay output (Output 4) is factory default for this operation.

20 Strobe OperatingThis output will operate when an alarm condition occurs and will reset once a valid usercode has been entered. The strobe output (Output 3) is factory default for this operationand is programmed to automatically reset after 8 hours of duration.

21 Silent AlarmThis output will operate when any zone programmed to be silent alarm has triggered. Theoutput will reset when the siren run time expires, an audible alarm has triggered, or a validuser code has been entered. Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 175 to program zones to besilent.

22 Alarm When In STAY ModeThis output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when thesystem has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The output will reset when thesystem has been disarmed.

23 Alarm When In AWAY ModeThis output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when thesystem has been armed in AWAY Mode. The output will reset when the system has beendisarmed.

24 Mimic System FaultThis output will operate without any time delays as soon as any system fault occursincluding if the AC mains supply has failed. The output will reset as soon as the systemfault or the AC mains supply has restored.

25 Fire Alarm ResettingThis output will operate when a 24-hour fire zone is triggered. The output will reset once avalid user code has been entered or when siren run time expires. If the control panel hasbeen partitioned, a user code allocated to another area may reset this output.

26 Fire Alarm LatchingThis output will operate when a 24-hour fire zone has triggered and will reset when thesystem has been armed or disarmed. If the system has been partitioned, the output willreset when any area has been armed or disarmed.



27 Fire Alarm VerificationThis feature is used on some commercial fire control panels to reduce false alarms onsmoke detectors. It is conceptually very similar to zone pulse count as used in some motiondetectors. Basically, a fire zone is allotted a pulse count of 3 pulses over a period of 3minutes.

If the smoke detector trips, the voltage to the smoke detector is disconnected for 15 secondsand then reapplied. No alarm has registered.

If within 3 minutes of the first trigger the unit triggers again, no alarm will be registeredand the voltage to the smoke detector will again be disconnected for 15 seconds and thenreapplied.

If a third trigger is detected within 3 minutes of the first trigger, (ie. 3 pulses in 3 minutes) afire alarm will be registered. Power to the smoke detector will be maintained to facilitateunit identification via the detector memory.

This output should be connected to the negative side of any fire/smoke detector. Toconfigure an output for this feature, use the following settings.

EVENT TYPE = 2,7 POLARITY = 10

TIMEBASE = 2 MULTIPLIER = 15

The zone that the fire/smoke detector is connected to should be programmed as follows:

ZONE TYPE = 13 ZONE PULSE COUNT = 3

ZONE PULSE COUNT TIME = 15

28 Remote Control 1 29 Remote Control 2

2 Remote Control 3These outputs can be remotely activated (Turned "On" or "Off") via the following methods:

1. Remote Codepad - Refer to the Master Code Functions - “Turning Outputs On/Off” onpage 87 for further information.

2. Remotely Via Alarm Link Software - Refer to your Alarm Link Instruction Manual for

further information.

2 Radio Control Output 1This output will operate if you hold down button 3 on the 4-channel hand held Transmitterwhen the system is armed or disarmed.

2 Radio Control Output 2This output will operate if you hold down button 4 on the 4-channel hand held Transmitterwhen the system is armed or disarmed. If you enable option 8 in LOCATION 436 on page227, this output will not operate and will only arm the system in STAY Mode 1.

2 Radio Control Output 1 – Not In AWAY ModeThis output will operate when you hold down button 3 on the 4-channel hand heldTransmitter only when the system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode2. The output will not operate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode.



2 Radio Control Output 2 – Not In AWAY Mode This output will operate when you hold down button 4 on the 4-channel hand heldTransmitter only when the system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode2. The output will not operate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode. If you enableoption 8 in LOCATION 436 on page 227, this output will not operate and will only arm thesystem in STAY Mode 1.

2 Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful CallsThis output will operate when the communication dialler has made 3 unsuccessful calls tothe base station receiver. The output will reset when all messages have been sent (ie. Whenthe buffer is empty or when all possible attempts have been made).

30 Communications FailureThis output will operate when the communication dialler has made all possible attempts toreach the base station receiver. The output will reset when the first "Kiss-Off" has beenreceived. This output will not operate for domestic formats.

31 Dialler DisabledThis output will operate as long as Option 1 in "LOCATION 177" on page 153 has beendisabled. The output will reset once Option 1 – Enable Dialler Reporting Functions in"LOCATION 177" on page 153 has been enabled.

32 Dialler ActiveThis output will operate when the communication dialler is on-line. The output will resetwhen the communication dialler has released the telephone line.

33 Ring DetectThis output will operate when an incoming call has been detected by the control panel. Theoutput will reset when the ringing has stopped or when the call has been answered.

35 Mimic Zone 1 39 Mimic Zone 5



38 Mimic Zone 4 3 Mimic Zone 8These output types will mimic the zone inputs. The output will operate when the zone isunsealed and will reset when the zone has resealed. They will operate regardless of thezone type chosen (ie. A zone "Not Used" can still operate a mimic output). This featureoperates when the system is armed or disarmed.

45 Global ChimeThis output will operate when any zones programmed as "Chime" have triggered. Theoutput will reset when the zone has resealed. Refer to Zone Type on page 169 for moreinformation.

46 Zone Not SealedThis output will operate whenever a burglary zone is unsealed. Chime zones will notoperate this output event type.

47 Zone Not Sealed After Exit TimeThis output will operate at the end of exit time if a burglary zone is unsealed. The outputwill reset when all zones are sealed or the system has been disarmed. Chime zones will notoperate this output event type.



49 AC Mains 60 Hz Or 50 HzThis output will activate when the AC mains supply frequency is at 60 Hz. The output willreset once the AC mains supply has returned to 50 Hz.

The following output event types are only applicable to the Solution Ultima 880 control panelwhen partitioned.

4 Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed 4 Area 2 Has Zone UnsealedThese two outputs will operate when a zone in their corresponding area has registered asunsealed when the area is either armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode, or the area isdisarmed.

ExampleZone 1 is allocated to Area 1. If Zone 1 becomes unsealed, Output Event Type 4,10 willoperate. The output will reset once the zone has resealed.

52 Area 1 In Alarm 53 Area 2 In AlarmThese two outputs will operate when a zone in their corresponding area has registered analarm. These outputs will reset once a valid user code has been entered.

ExampleZone 1 has been allocated to Area 1. If Zone 1 has registered an alarm, Output Event Type5,2 will operate. The output will reset once a valid user code allocated to operate Area 1has been entered.

56 Area 1 Is Armed 57 Area 2 Is ArmedThese two outputs will operate when their corresponding area has been armed in AWAYMode or STAY Mode 1. The output will reset once the corresponding area is disarmed.

ExampleIf area 1 has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1, Output Event Type 5,6 willoperate. The output will reset once Area 1 is disarmed.

5 Area 1 Is Disarmed 5 Area 2 Is DisarmedThese two outputs will operate when their corresponding area has been disarmed. Theoutput will reset once the corresponding area is armed.

ExampleIf Area 1 has been disarmed, Output Event Type 5,10 will operate. The output will resetonce Area 1 is disarmed.

5 Any Areas ArmedThis output will operate when either Area 1 or Area 2 has become armed in AWAY Modeor STAY Mode 1. The output will reset when both areas are disarmed.

5 Any Areas DisarmedThis output will operate when either Area 1 or Area 2 has become disarmed. The outputwill reset when both areas are armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.



60 Area 1 Codepad Data TerminalThis output type is used to connect the data terminal of the Area 1 codepad when you areusing the Master Partitioned codepad as the main codepad. Set DIP switch 1 in the ONposition for the Area 1 codepad to operate correctly. Refer to Figure 12: DIP SwitchLocation On Back Of Codepad PCB below for the location of the DIP switches on the packof the codepad.

If you are not using a Master Partitioned as the main codepad, connect the data cable fromthe Area 1 codepad to the DATA terminal on the control panel and enable Option 2 in“LOCATION 444” on page 241.

Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 247 for further information onconnecting codepads when the system has been partitioned.

61 Area 2 Codepad Data TerminalThis output type is used to connect the data terminal of the Area 2 codepad. Set DIPSwitch 2 to the ON position for the Area 2 codepad to operate correctly. Refer to Figure12: DIP Switch Location On Back Of Codepad PCB below for the location of the DIPswitches on the back of the codepad.

Figure 12: DIP Switch Location On Back Of Codepad PCB



Output PolarityThere are fifteen different polarities to choose from. Each polarity is designated by a number. Thisnumber needs to be programmed into the appropriate location of the output being used to indicate howthe output should operate.

Option Polarity Option Polarity

0 Output Not Used

1 Normally Open, Going Low 8 Normally Low, Going Open

2 Normally Open, Pulsing Low 9 Normally Low, Pulsing Open

3 Normally Open, One Shot Low 10 Normally Low, One Shot Open

4 Normally Open, One Shot Low (Retrigger) 11 Normally Low, One Shot Open (Retrigger)

5 Normally Open, One Shot Low (Can Reset) 12 Normally Low, One Shot Open (Can Reset)

6 Normally Open, One Show Low (Alarm) 13 Normally Low, One Shot Open (Alarm)

7 Normally Open, Latching Low 14 Normally Low, Latching Open

Table 116: Event Type Polarities

Output Not UsedIf an output is not required for use, the polarity should be programmed as zero.

Normally Open, Going LowThis polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs. The outputwill switch back to open circuit when the event has restored. Time parameters are not applicable tothis polarity.

Normally Open, Pulsing LowThis polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to pulsing zero volts when the event occurs.The output will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored. Time parameters vary the"On" time of the pulse.

Normally Open, One Shot LowThis one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs.The output will switch back to open circuit when the time parameter setting has expired. This oneshot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset.

Normally Open, One Shot Low With RetriggerThis one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs.Every time the event occurs, it will restart the one shot timer. The output will switch back to opencircuit once the one shot time has expired.

This polarity is ideally suited for lighting control. A PIR can be used to trigger an output for turningon lights. While ever there is movement, the PIR will keep re-triggering the output and lengthen thetime the lights will remain switched on.

Normally Open, One Shot Low With ResetThis one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs.The output will switch back to open circuit when the one shot time has expired or when the event hasreturned to normal. This means the operation of the output can be shortened regardless of the timeparameter programmed.

0

1

2

3

4

5



Normally Open, One Shot Low With AlarmThis one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs.The output will switch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired, when the event hasreturned to normal or when the system has been disarmed.

This polarity is ideally suited for the operation of strobe lights as they can be programmed (Up to 99hours) to reset and prevent them from burning out or becoming annoying to others from prolongedoperation.

Normally Open, Latching LowThis polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs. The output

will switch back to open circuit once the 7 button on the remote codepad is held down until twobeeps are heard. Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity.

Normally Low, Going OpenThis polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs. The outputwill switch back to zero volts when the event has restored. Time parameters are not applicable to thispolarity.

Normally Low, Pulsing OpenThis polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to pulsing open circuit when the event occurs.The output will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored. Time parameters vary the"Off" time of the pulse.

Normally Low, One Shot OpenThis one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs.The output will switch back to zero volts when the time parameter has expired. This one shot timesetting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset.

Normally Low, One Shot Open With RetriggerThis one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs.Every time the event occurs, it will restart the one shot timer. The output will switch back to zerovolts once the one shot time has expired.

Normally Low, One Shot Open With ResetThis one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs.The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired or when the event hasreturned to normal. This means the one shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time setting.

Normally Low, One Shot Open With AlarmThis one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs.The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired, when the event hasreturned to normal or when the system has been disarmed. This means that the one shot timer can beshortened regardless of the time setting.

Normally Low, Latching OpenThis polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs. The output

will switch back to zero volts once the 7 button on the remote codepad has been held down until twobeeps are heard. Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity.

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14



Timing Of OutputsThe timing of outputs is calculated by the time base and a multiplier. These two values play differentroles depending on the polarity selected. When programming outputs to pulse, both the "On" and"Off" times can be set. One shot polarities can be programmed to operate between 200 ms up to 99hours in duration.

TimeBase

MultiplierTens / Units

The maximum value that can be programmed in the two multiplier locations is 9999.

Option Time Base

1 200 ms

2 1 Second

3 1 Minute (60 Seconds)

4 1 Hour (60 Minutes)

Table 117: Time Base Settings

The time base settings can be set to only one of the values listed in "Table 117: Time Base Settings".The multiplier value is a two digit decimal number from 00-99. For greater accuracy, use 60 secondsfor 1 minute intervals and use 60 minutes for one hour intervals.

Pulsing PolaritiesWhen calculating pulsing polarities both the "On" and "Off" times need to be programmed. Theduration or "On" time of an output is determined by selecting only one of the time base options from"Table 117: Time Base Settings". This means there are only four "On" times to choose from.

The "Off" time is calculated as a multiple of the "On" time by choosing a decimal number between 00and 99. If an output is required to operate for 200 ms every five seconds, program the time settings asfollows;

1 2 5

On Time Off Time

ON Time OFF Time Increments Tolerance

200 ms 200 ms - 19.8 ms 200 ms +/- 200 ms

1 Sec 1 Sec - 99 Sec’s 1 Sec +/- 1 Sec

1 Min 1 Min - 99 Min’s 1 Min +/- 1 Min

1 Hour 1 Hour - 99 Hours 1 Hour +/- 1 Hour

Table 118: Pulsing Time Settings



One Shot PolaritiesThe duration or "On" time of an output is determined by the product of the time base and themultiplier.

If an output is required to operate for five seconds, program the time settings as follows;

2 0 5

Time Base Multiplier

The "On" time is calculated by multiplying the time base setting (1 second) by the multiplier value(05).

(ie. 1 x 05 = 5 seconds)

On Time Increments Tolerance

200 ms - 19.8 Sec’s 200 ms +/- 200 ms

1 Sec - 99 Sec’s 1 Sec +/- 1 Sec

1 Min - 99 Min’s 1 Min +/- 1 Min

1 Hour - 99 Hours 1 Hour +/- 1 Hour

Table 119: One Shot Time Settings



System Event Timers


• Entry Timer 1

• Entry Timer 2

• Exit Time

• Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode

• Delay Alarm Reporting Time

• Sensor Watch Time

• Codepad Lockout Time

• Siren Run Time

• Siren Sound Rate

• Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer

• Auto Arming Time

• Auto Disarming Time

• Kiss-Off Wait Time

• System Time

• System Date

System Event TimersThis section covers the features that involve timing. Features such as entry and exit times, sensorwatch time, siren run time and system date and time along with a host of other timers are discussedextensively in this section.

Programming Entry/Exit TimersThere are two locations to be programmed for Entry Timer 1, Entry Timer 2, Exit Time For AWAYMode and Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode.

The first location of the timer is for programming increments of 1 second. The second location of thetimer is for programming increments of 16 seconds. By adding these two locations together will givethe total time required.

ExampleIf you require the entry time to expire after 18 seconds, you would need to program “LOCATION410” as 2 (ie. 2 x 1 second = 2 seconds) and “LOCATION 411” as 1 (ie. 1 x 16 seconds = 16seconds). This would give you the total time of 18 seconds (ie. 2 + 16 seconds = 18 seconds.

Entry Timer 1

LOCATION 410 - 411 (Defaulted To 20 Seconds) 41


410 Increments Of 1 Second (0 – 15 Sec’s)

411 Increments Of 16 Seconds (0 – 240 Sec’s)

Table 120: Entry Timer 1 Locations

Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second. Entry Timer1 is the delay time used by the zone type – Delay-1. Refer to Zone Types on page 171 for moreinformation.

Entry Timer 2



412 Increments Of 1 Second (0 - 15 Sec’s)

413 Increments Of 16 Seconds (0 –240 Sec’s)

Table 121: Entry Timer 2 Locations

Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second. Entry Timer2 is the delay time used by the zone type – Delay-2. Refer to Zone Types on page 171 for moreinformation.



Exit Time

LOCATION 414 – 415 (Defaulted To 60 Seconds) 3




Table 122: Exit Time Locations

Exit time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second. When armingthe system in AWAY Mode, the remote codepad will beep during exit time until the remaining 10seconds where the codepad will give you one continuous beep to inform you that the end of exit timeis approaching.

The remote codepad will always give one short beep at the end of exit time when arming in STAYMode 1 or STAY Mode 2.

Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode





Table 123: Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode Locations

"Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode" is the delay time used for ALL zones except 24 hour burglaryand 24 hour fire zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. Each zoneincluding delay zones will have the entry delay as programmed in "LOCATION 416 - 417" (ie. Theentry guard timer will override the delay time programmed for a delay zone). If the entry guard timerhas been programmed as "0" each zone will act as per its programmed zone type.

Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 179 to program zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1.Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 86 to program zones to be automatically isolated inSTAY Mode 2 via the Master Code.

Delay Alarm Reporting Time

LOCATION 418 – 419 (Defaulted To 00 Seconds) 00




Table 124: Delay Alarm Reporting Time Locations

These locations programs the time in seconds that a delayed report waits dormant in the dial bufferbefore reporting to the receiving party. If a user code holder resets the alarm condition within thistime frame, the control panel will clear the dialler buffer and prevent the alarm from reporting to thereceiving party. Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 175 to program zones for delay alarm reporting.

System Event Timers 217


Sensor Watch Time

LOCATION 420 - 421 00


420 Increments Of Days (Tens Digit)

421 Increments Of Days (Units Digit)

Table 125: Sensor Watch Time Locations

The time set in these two locations determine how many days (0-99) a zone may remain sealed beforeregistering as a fault. This feature is only active when the system is in the disarmed state. If a zoneprogrammed for sensor watch has not become unsealed and reset during this time, the FAULTindicator will illuminate. Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 53 for further information on sensorwatch faults. Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 175 for programming zones for sensor watch.

The sensor watch time counter is only active whilst the control panel is disarmed. Therefore, if thesystem is only disarmed for 8 hours a day and the sensor watch time is programmed for 1 day, a zonethat is programmed for sensor watch will register a sensor watch fault if not triggered during thedisarmed state within 3 days.

This feature would be useful in a situation where someone has moved objects in the view of thedetector, blocking out the detector from picking up movement. Refer to LOCATION 333 - 334 onpage 186 if you wish to disable sensor watch reports.

Codepad Lockout Time

LOCATION 422 0


422 Increments Of 10 Seconds (0 - 150 Seconds)

Table 126: Codepad Lockout Time Locations

All codepads will be locked out for the specified time programmed if an invalid code has been enteredmore times than allowed by the code retry attempts programmed in "LOCATION 368 - 370" on page195. If the Codepad Lockout Time is programmed as zero, no codepad lockout will occur.



Siren Run Time

LOCATION 423 (Defaulted To 5 Minutes) 5


423 Increments Of 1 Minute (0 – 15)

Table 127: Siren Run Time Location

The siren run time determines how long the horn speaker will activate during an alarm condition. Thesiren run time can be programmed between 0 - 15 minutes (+/- 1 minute).

Siren Sound Rate

LOCATION 424 7


424 Siren Sound Rate (0 = SLOWEST 15 = FASTEST)

Table 128: Siren Sound Rate Location

The siren sound rate varies the frequency of the siren tone. Programming the siren sound rate as azero is the slowest and fifteen is the fastest. The siren sound rate does not change the frequency ratefor the fire alarm tone.



Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer

LOCATION 425 1


425 Increments Of 5 Minutes (0 – 75 Minutes)

Table 129: Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer Location

This location sets the time period that will warn you before the control panel will automatically arm inAWAY Mode. The codepad will beep once every second until the pre-alert timer has expired, afterthis time, the system will automatically arm itself in AWAY Mode. If you require the system toautomatically arm in STAY Mode 1, enable Option 4 in “LOCATION 440” on page 231.

Once the control panel has automatically armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1, exit time willcommence. If a valid user code is entered during the pre-alert time, the auto arming time asprogrammed in “LOCATION 426 - 429” will extend by one hour.

If you require a programmable output to operate during the auto arming pre-alert time, refer to OutputEvent Type – Auto Arm Pre-Arming Alert Time on page 202.

Auto Arming Time

LOCATION 426 - 429 0000






Table 130: Auto Arming Time Locations

These locations are used to program the actual time of the day that the system will automatically armitself in AWAY Mode. This time must be set in 24 hour format (ie. 10:30 PM would be programmedas 2230). Refer to Option 4 in “LOCATION 440” on page 231 if you require the system to arm inSTAY Mode 1.

If forced arming has been disabled for any zone, the feature of automatic arming will operateregardless of any zones being unsealed. Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 179 for more informationon programming zones for forced arming.

User code 16 will be report when the feature of automatic arming is used.

On Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have been partitioned into two separate areas, bothareas will automatically arm in AWAY Mode at the same time every day.



Auto Disarming Time

LOCATION 430 - 433 0000






Table 131: Auto Disarming Time Locations

These locations are used to program the actual time of the day that the system will automaticallydisarm itself from AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. This time must be set in 24 hourformat (ie. 10:30 PM would be programmed as 2230).

User code 16 will report when the feature of automatic disarming is used.

On Solution Ultima 880 control panels that have been partitioned into two separate areas, bothareas will automatically disarm at the same time every day.

Kiss-Off Wait Time

LOCATION 434 3


434 Increments Of 500 ms (500 ms – 8 Sec’s)

Table 132: Kiss-Off Wait Time Location

This location sets the time that the control panel will wait for acknowledgment before resending thereport. This applies only to Contact ID Format and 4 + 2 Express Formats.

Speaker Beep Volume

LOCATION 435


435 0 = No Beeps / 15 = Loudest Beeps

Table 133: Speaker Volume Location

This location allows you to adjust the volume of speaker beeps for remote radio operation.



System Time

LOCATION 901 – 904 0000


901 Current Hour In 24 Hour Time (Tens Digit)

902 Current Hour In 24 Hour Time (Units Digit)

903 Current Minute (Tens Digit)

904 Current Minute (Units Digit)

Table 134: System Time Locations

The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel has a real time 24 hour clock that needs to beset during installation. This time must be set in 24 hour format HHMM (ie. 10:30 PM would beprogrammed as 2230). Every time the system has been powered down, the system time will need tobe reset.



System Date

LOCATION 905 – 910 010101


905 Day Of The Month (Tens Digit)

906 Day Of The Month (Units Digit)

907 Month Of The Year (Tens Digit)

908 Month Of The Year (Units Digit)

909 Year (Tens Digit)

910 Year (Units Digit)

Table 135: System Date Locations

The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel has a real time 12 month calendar that needsto be set during installation. This time must be set using the format DDMMYY (ie. If the date that isrequired to be set is the 1 July 1997, you would then program 010797). Every time the system hasbeen powered down, the system date will need to be reset.

Setting The Date and TimeThe Master Code holder is allowed to set the date and time as follows:

How To Set The New Date and Time





ExampleIf the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1997 at 10:30 PM, program the date and time asfollows;

2580 + 6 +

01 + 01 + 97 + 22 + 30 +



System and Consumer Options


• System Options 1




• Consumer Options 1



• Radio Input Options

Programming Option BitsWhen programming these locations, you will notice that there are four options per location. You mayselect one, two, three or all four of these options, however, only one number needs to be programmed.This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together. Program a seven (7) if yourequire options 1, 2 and 4 simultaneously (ie. 1 + 2 + 4 = 7).


Option Description

1 Enable EDM Smart Lockout

2 Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker

4 Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm/Disarm

8 Assign Button 4 On Transmitter To Operate STAY Mode 1




System Options 1

LOCATION 436 1

Option Description

1 Enable EDM Smart Lockout

2 Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker

4 Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm/Disarm

8 Assign Button 4 On Transmitter To Arm STAY Mode 1

Table 137: System Options 1

Enable EDM Smart LockoutThis feature allows the control panel to remove any zones that are programmed for lockout diallerfrom the lockout list while the sirens are running. This feature allows a monitoring station to receivezone alarm reports from previously locked out zones during siren run time. Refer to Zone Options 1on page 175 for information on programming zones for lockout dialler and lockout siren.

Refer to Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler on page 182 to program the number of times the zonecan report before being locked out.

Enable Monitoring Of Horn SpeakerIf this option has been selected, the control panel will detect when the horn speaker has beendisconnected from the speaker terminals. The FAULT indicator will illuminate when the horn speakerhas been disconnected and will extinguish when the horn speaker has been reconnected.

If an output is required to operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected, refer to Output EventType – Horn Speaker Monitor Fail on page 204 for more information.

Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm/DisarmThis option will allow the strobe to indicate when the system is armed and disarmed when remotelyoperating the system via the 304 Mhz RF Receiver (RF3212).

No Of Seconds System Status

3 Seconds System Disarmed

6 Seconds System Armed In AWAY Mode

6 Seconds System Armed In STAY Mode 1

Table 138: Strobe Indications For Remote Operations

Assign Button 4 On Transmitter To Arm STAY Mode 1This option will allow button 4 on the 4 Channel Hand Held Transmitter (RF3334) to arm the systemin STAY Mode 1.

1

2

4

8

System and Consumer Options 227


System Options 2

LOCATION 437 0

Option Description

1 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent

2 Enable Codepad Fire To Be Silent

4 Enable Codepad Medical To Be Silent

8 Enable Access Denied To Be Silent


Enable Codepad Panic To Be SilentIf this option has been selected, a codepad panic alarm or radio remote panic alarm will not operatethe horn speaker, the bell or the strobe outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs will

operate after a codepad panic alarm has been activated when the 1 and 3 buttons or the and buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously. Selecting this option does not effect

the operation of the communication dialler.

If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad panic alarm, program “LOCATION 349 - 350” onpage 190 as zero.

Enable Codepad Fire To Be SilentIf this option has been selected, a codepad fire alarm will not operate the horn speaker, the bell or thestrobe outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs will operate after a codepad fire alarm

has been activated when the 4 and 6 buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously.Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler.

If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad fire alarm, program “LOCATION 351 - 352” onpage 191 as zero.

Enable Codepad Medical To Be SilentIf this option has been selected, a codepad medical alarm will not operate the horn speaker, the bell orthe strobe outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs will operate after a codepad fire

alarm has been activated when the 7 and 9 buttons on the remote codepad are pressedsimultaneously. Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler.

If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad medical alarm, program “LOCATION 353 - 354”on page 191 as zero.

Enable Access Denied To Be SilentIf this option has been selected, a codepad tamper alarm will not operate the horn speaker, bell or thestrobe outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs will operate after a codepad tamperalarm has occurred.

Refer to "LOCATION 368" on page 195 to set the number of invalid code retries before an alarmcondition occurs. Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler. Ifyou wish to disable the reporting of access denied reports program “LOCATION 369 - 370” as zero.

4

8

2

1



System Options 3

LOCATION 438 8

Option Description

1 Enable AC Fail In 1 Hour

2 Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication

4 Enable Pulse Count Handover

8 Enable Handover Delay To Be Sequential


Enable AC Fail In 1 HourIf this option has been selected, the MAINS indicator will begin to flash as soon as the AC mainssupply becomes disconnected. An "AC Loss" signal (Contact ID Event Code 301) will be sent to thebase station receiver after the AC mains supply has been disconnected continuously for more than 60minutes.

If this option has not been selected, the MAINS indicator will begin to flash and an "AC Loss" signal(Contact ID Event Code 301) will be sent to the base station receiver after the AC mains power hasbeen disconnected continuously for 2 minutes.

The MAINS indicator will cease to flash once the AC mains supply has been restored for more thantwo minutes. An “AC Loss Restore” report will be sent to the base station receiver after the ACmains supply has been restored continuously for more than 2 minutes irrespective of this option beingset.

Ignore AC Mains Fail IndicationIf this option has been selected, the MAINS indicator will not flash, nor will the codepad beep onceevery minute when the AC mains has been disconnected from the control panel. If you require aprogrammable output to operate when the AC mains has failed, refer to Output Event Type – AC Failon page 204.

If this options has been selected, an “AC Loss” report (Contact ID Event Code 301) will still report tothe base station receiver unless disabled in “LOCATION 360 - 361” on page 193.

Enable Zone Pulse Count HandoverIf this option has been selected, any zone pulse count readings will handover and accumulate to anyzone that is triggered during the same arming cycle. Zone pulse count handover will only operatewith zone pulse count options 8-15. Refer to Zone Pulse Count on page 173 and Zone Pulse CountTime on page 174 for more information.

24-hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones. 24-hour zones canhandover pulses to other zones.

Enable Handover Delay To Be SequentialIf this option has been selected, handover delay will be sequential (ie. In numerical order from lowestto highest). If the sequence is broken before the entry time expires, an alarm will occur. If this optionhas not been selected, handover delay will follow the entry path provided that a delay zone has beentriggered first. Refer to “Handover Zone” on page 171 for more information.

2

4

1

8



System Options 4

LOCATION 439 0

Option Description

1 Enable Control Panel To Power Up In The Disarmed State

2 Enable Arm/Disarm Tracking On Power Up

4 Enable Internal Crystal To Keep Time

8 Enable Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface / Night Arm Station Or RE005


Enable Control Panel To Power Up In The Disarmed StateIf this option has been selected, the control panel will power up in the disarmed state once the batteryand AC mains have been reconnected after the system has been powered down.

If this option is not selected, the system will always power up armed in AWAY Mode.

Enable Arm/Disarm Tracking On Power UpIf enabled, the control panel will keep its current armed status in non-volatile memory. If for anyreason the control panel is restarted due to a power failure, the control panel will return to the armedor disarmed status that the control panel was in before the power failed.

ExampleIf the system was disarmed prior to the system being powered down, when the system is poweredback up, the system will return to the disarmed state.

Enable Internal Crystal To Keep TimeIf this option has been selected, it will force the control panel not to use the mains frequency as a timebase to keep time. The control panel will use the internal crystal (XTAL) to keep track of time. Thisoption is useful in countries that do not have a constant mains frequency.

Enable Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface / Night Arm Station Or RE005This option must be selected when using the Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface (CC813), 2 ChannelRadio Interface (RE005), or the Night Arm Station (CP105). This option allows the control panel tobe operated using any of these three accessories. When using these optional accessories, they willreport as User Code 16.

Using a Solution Ultima 880 control panel that has been partitioned, the Night Arm Station willnot operate the system.

1

8

4

2



Consumer Options 1

LOCATION 440 0

Option Description

1 Send Test Reports Only If The System Is Armed

2 Send Test Report After Siren Reset

4 Enable Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1

8 Enable The STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status

Table 142: Consumer Options 1

Send Test Reports Only If The System Is ArmedIf this option has been selected, test reports (Contact ID Event Code 602) will only be sent when thesystem has been armed in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. It is no longer necessaryto send a test report as well as an opening and closing report every day.

During the working week, most commercial premises would be open and therefore a test report is notnecessary, as open and close reports would be sent at the time programmed. If you wish to manually

send a test report, hold down the 9 button until two beeps are heard.

Refer to Test Reporting Time on page 197 to set the test report time required. To set the first testreport, refer to the Installer Code Function – Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report onpage 65.

Enable - Send Test Report After Siren ResetSelecting this option will force the control panel to send a test report after the siren has reset. This canbe used to indicate to the monitoring station that the control panel itself has not been tampered withduring the alarm period.

Enable Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1If automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 is preferred to automatic arming in AWAY Mode, this optionwill need to be selected.

Refer to “LOCATION 426 - 429” on page 220 to program the time that the control panel willautomatically arm itself and “LOCATION 425” on page 220 to set the auto arming pre-alert time.

When using this option with a partitioned Solution Ultima 880 control panel, both areas willautomatically arm in STAY Mode 1.

Enable The STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm StatusIf this option has been selected, the STAY indicator will be used to display when day alarm has beenenabled. The STAY indicator will flash once every 3 seconds while day alarm is active.

Refer to “LOCATION 265” on page 164 for programming zones to operate for day alarm operation.

Day alarm can be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button for 2 seconds. Three beepsindicate day alarm is turned on and two beeps indicate day alarm is turned off. Refer to Day AlarmOperation on page 165 for more information.

1

8

4

2



Consumer Options 2

LOCATION 441 2

Option Description

1 Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode

2 Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2

4 Enable Single Button Disarming In STAY Mode 1 & STAY Mode 2

8 Enable Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm


Enable Codepad Extinguish ModeIf this option has been selected, all indicators on the remote codepad display will extinguish if abutton is not pressed for 60 seconds. The indicators will illuminate when there is an alarm (except asilent alarm), when a button is pressed on the codepad, when the AC mains fail beeps, or if the entrytimer has been activated.

Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2If this option has been selected, the hold down functions for arming in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1and STAY Mode 2 will be functional. Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 93 for moreinformation.

Enable Single Button Disarming From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2This option will only operate when Option 2 in this location has also been selected. This option willallow hold down functions for disarming from STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2. Refer to HoldDown Functions on page 93 for more information.

Enable Alarm Memory Reset On DisarmThis option allows the memory of alarm events to be cleared from the remote codepad when thesystem has been disarmed. If this option has not been selected, the system will need to be armed anddisarmed again to clear alarm memory from the remote codepad.

4

1

2

8



Consumer Options 3

LOCATION 442 5

Option Description

1 Enable Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps

2 Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9

4 Enable Operation Of Siren & Strobe In STAY Mode 1 & STAY Mode 2

8 Enable Zone Tamper Alarms To Be Silent


Enable Codepad Fault Alarm BeepsIf this option has been enabled, the codepad will flash the FAULT indicator and beep once everyminute until acknowledged when a system fault has occurred. To acknowledge a new fault and stopthe codepad from beeping once every minute, simply press the button.

If this option has not been enabled, the codepad will only flash the FAULT indicator when a new faulthas occurred, but will not cause the codepad to beep once every minute until the fault has beenacknowledge or rectified.

Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9

This option if selected, will allow the customer to use the digit 3 after entering their code to disarmthe system to activate a duress alarm.

Enable Operation Of Siren & Strobe In STAY Mode 1 & STAY Mode 2This option will need to be selected if audible alarms are required when the system has been armed inSTAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.

Enable Zone Tamper Alarms To Be SilentThis option allows tamper alarms when using Option 14 in LOCATION 266 on page 166 or thetamper alarms on RF wireless devices to be silent when triggered into alarm condition.

1

2

4

8



Radio Input Options

LOCATION 443 0

Option Description

1 DS304 Mhz Receiver (RF3212)

2 Latching Keyswitch Input

4 Momentary Keyswitch Input

8 Reserved

Table 145: Radio Input Options

DS304 Mhz Receiver (RF3212)This option needs to be selected when using the optional 304 Mhz RF Receiver (RF3212) for remoteoperations using radio remote hand held Transmitters.

Latching Keyswitch InputThis option allows you to connect a latching keyswitch to the JP3 terminals D and GND to remotelyarm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode.

Momentary Keyswitch InputThis option allows you to connect a momentary keyswitch to the JP3 terminals D and GND toremotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode.

1

2

4



Partitioning



• Operating Codepads In Partitioning

• Programming

• Partitioning Options 1

• Partitioning Options 2

• Zone Allocations

• User Code Allocations

• Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning

• Codepad Connections For Partitioning

The Solution Ultima 880 control panel includes a feature called partitioning which caneffectively transform your single control panel and split the system into two separate areas. Normallyarming and disarming the system would turn the entire system on or off. However, when theSolution Ultima 880 control panel has been partitioned, you may arm or disarm an individualarea without affecting the other area.

Partitioning is extremely useful when you wish to secure sheds, dual occupancy dwellings, grannyflats, shops and offices.

When partitioning, only the CP5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepad and the CP5 MasterPartitioned (CP500P) codepad can be used.

CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad

This codepad is only used on the Solution Ultima 880 control panelwhen partitioned. The Master Partitioned LED codepad will allow the userto operate both areas individually from the same codepad, without the needto operate individual areas from separate codepads.



Figure 13: CP5 Master Partitioned LEDCodepad (CP500P)

The indicators on a CP5 Master Partitioned LED codepad are configured in to four groups. Followingis a description of what the indicators mean.



On Zone Is Unsealed

Off Zone Is SealedFlashing Fast

(0.25 Sec On – 0.25 Sec Off) Zone Is In Alarm Condition



1



Area On/Off IndicatorsThe group of four Area On/Off indicators (1 – 4) show the status of each area (ie. If an indicator isilluminated, that area is armed and if the indicator is not illuminated, that area is disarmed).

If an area is armed in STAY Mode 1, the corresponding Area On/Off indicator will be illuminated inconjunction with the PARTIAL indicator. If the area is armed in AWAY Mode, only thecorresponding Area On/Off Indicator will be illuminated.

Area On/Off Indicator Definition

On Area Is Armed In AWAY Mode Or STAY Mode 1

Off Area Is Disarmed

Table 147: Area On/Off Indicators

Area Display IndicatorsA group of four Area Display Indicators indicate which area is currently being displayed (ie. Ifnumber 1 is being displayed, all information provided on the display relates only to Area 1. If number2 is being displayed, all information provided on the display relates only to Area 2).

Pressing the button will toggle or move you to the next area display (ie. If Area 1 is currentlybeing displayed, pressing the button will toggle or move you to Area 2. Pressing the button a second time will toggle you back to display information for Area 1).

Area Display Indicators Definition

On Indicates Current Area Being Displayed

Off Indicates Current Area Not Being Displayed

Table 148: Area Display Indicators

Status IndicatorsA group of four indicators display the following:

PARTIAL IndicatorThe PARTIAL indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1. The PARTIALindicator will also flash in unison with the AUX indicator when Installer’s Programming Mode orMaster Code Functions are used.

For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1, refer to page 42. Refer to ZoneOptions 1 on page 175 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1.


On System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1

Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode 1

Table 149: Partial Indicator

2

4

3

Partitioning 237


AUX IndicatorIf Option 8 in “LOCATION 444” on page 241 has been enabled, the AUX indicator will be used todisplay when the control panel is using the telephone line. The AUX indicator will also flash in unisonwith the PARTIAL indicator when Installer’s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used.





Table 150: AUX Indicator


When programming numbers (ie Installer’s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions), theMAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15. The MAINSindicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator (eg: If you program atwelve, the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate).





FAULT IndicatorThe FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a system fault. Refer to FaultAnalysis Mode on page 95 for more information on system faults.




















Partitioning 239


Operating Codepads In Partitioning

Operating From A CP5 Area Addressable LED CodepadWhen operating a CP5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepad in a system that has been partitioned, thedisplay and operations are exactly the same as the CP5 Eight Zone LED codepad except that thecommands issued from the codepad only effects the area that the codepad is allocated to. Refer toSystem Operations on page 40 for more information on operating the system.

ExampleIf the codepad is allocated to Area 2, only user codes that have been allocated to Area 2 can operatethe codepad. If user codes only have access to Area 1, entering their code at the Area 2 codepad willnot work.

If you wish to determine which codepad you are currently operating, hold down the 8 button todetermine which area that the codepad is allocated to (ie. If Zone 1 illuminates, the codepad isallocated to Area 1, if Zone 2 illuminates, the codepad is allocated to Area 2). Refer to Hold DownFunctions on page 93 for more information.

Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned CodepadWhen operating a CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepad in a system that has been partitioned, alloperations are the same as the CP5 Area Addressable codepad with one exception. All operations areonly related to the Area Display that is being indicated on the codepad at the time (ie. If the AreaDisplay illuminates number 2, the codepad is displaying information only for Area 2. Therefore, alloperations will only effect Area 2).

Refer to System Operations on page 40 for more information on operating the system.

How To Move From One Area To The Next

1. Press the button.The Area Display indicator will move to the next area display (ie. If the Area Display

illuminates number 1, pressing the button will toggle to display Area 2. Pressing the button a second time will toggle the display back to Area 1).



ProgrammingThe following locations area only applicable when partitioning the Solution Ultima 880 controlpanel. Remember that when programming option bit locations, you may add the options together (eg:If you require both options 2 and 4, you would add the two options together and program a 6).

Partitioning Options 1

LOCATION 444 0

Option Description

1 Enable First To Open/Last To Close Reporting

2 Enable Main Codepad To Display Data Only For Area 1

4 Allow Resetting Of Sirens From Either Area

8 Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When Using Telephone Line

Table 154: Partitioning Options 1

Enable First To Open/Last To Close ReportingThis option needs to be enabled if only one Open/Close report is required when the system has beenpartitioned. Rather than having individual Open/Close reports fore each area, a closing report will besent only when BOTH areas have been armed and an opening report will be sent as soon as one areahas been disarmed.

The reports will be sent on the Subscriber ID Number allocated to that particular area. Subscriber IDNumbers and Open/Close reports must be programmed for both areas.

The option of first to open/last to close reporting is only applicable when all user codes havetheir priority level set with no open/close reports. Therefore, if user codes have priority levelsset to open/close reports, an opening or closing report will always be reported when any area isdisarmed or armed irrespective of which area was first to open or last to close.

Enable Main Codepad To Display Data Only For Area 1If this option has been enabled, the DATA terminal on the Solution Ultima 880 control panel willbe configured to send status information only relevant to Area 1. This allows you to connect an areaaddressable codepad (CP500A) set for Area 1 operation to the DATA terminal of the control panelinstead of connecting the addressable codepad to an output.

If this option has not been enabled, the CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepad will need to beused as the DATA terminal on the control panel would display information for both Area 1 and Area2.

An advantage in using this option is that it allows you to configure a system into separate areas whilestill leaving the maximum number of programmable outputs available for other applications.

2

1

Partitioning 241


Allow Resetting Of Sirens From Either AreaThis option is only applicable when the control panel has been partitioned. If this option has beenenabled, any valid user code from either Area 1 or Area 2 will be able to reset the horn speaker,strobe, bell or EDMSAT outputs from operating. This option does not allow a user code allocatedfrom one area to disarm another area.

Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When Using Telephone LineIf this option has been enabled, the AUX indicator on the CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepadwill illuminate when the control panel has seized the telephone line to send a report. The AUXindicator will extinguish once the telephone line has been released.

Partitioning Options 2

LOCATION 445 0

Option Description

1 Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2

2 Enable “User Code + 0 + AWAY” To Arm/Disarm Both Areas

4 Reserved

8 Reserved

Table 155: Partitioning Options 2

Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2If this option has been selected, it will automatically set all reports for Area 1 to Receiver 1 and allreports for Area 2 to Receiver 2.

If this option has not been selected, all reporting will need to be manually programmed to report onReceiver 1 or Receiver 2 for both areas.

Enable “User Code + 0 + AWAY” To Arm/Disarm Both AreasIf this option has been selected, it will allow any user allocated to both areas to arm or disarm bothareas at the same time without the need to enter the code at each area codepad. Refer to Arm orDisarm Both Areas At The Same Time on page 76 and 92 for more information.

If the user arms both areas at the same time, if in “LOCATION 444” on page 241 has the option “FirstTo Open/Last To Close Reporting” enabled, only a closing report for the Area 2 will be reported.

If the user disarms both areas at the same time, if in “LOCATION 444” on page 241 has the option“First To Open/Last To Close Reporting” enabled, only an opening report for Area 1 will be reported.

Reserved

Reserved

4

8

2

4

8

1



Zone AllocationsEach area can have up to eight zones allocated to it. The eight locations for each area representsZONE indicators one to eight on the remote area addressable codepad. Any of the zone inputs 1 – 8can be mapped to any area to appear as any zone on the remote area addressable codepad (ie. Anyzone can be programmed to both Area 1 and Area 2 to become common zones).

Zones that have been programmed as common zones (eg: Allocated to both Area 1 and Area 2) willreport to the base station receiver on group zero (ie Area 1 = Group 1 and Area 2 = Group 2). Zonesthat are allocated only to one area will report on the corresponding group number. Common zonesthat are programmed other than 24 hour zone types will not activate an alarm until both areas havebeen armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.

Zone Allocations For Area 1

LOCATION 446 - 453 00000000


446 Area 1 – Zone 1 Indicator








Table 156: Solution Ultima 880 – Zone Allocations For Area 1

Zone Allocations For Area 2

LOCATION 454 - 461 00000000










Table 157: Solution Ultima 880 – Zone Allocations For Area 2

Partitioning 243


Example

In this example, zones 1, 2, 3 and 4 have been allocated to Area 1 to appear as zones 1, 2, 3 and 4.Zones 1, 5, 6, 7 & 8 have been allocated to Area 2 to appear as zones 1, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Programmingthe same zone into more than one area indicates that the zone will operate as a common zone.

Figure 14: Area 1 Codepad Display Figure 15: Area 2 Codepad Display

Area 1 Zone AllocationsLOCATION 434 – 441

12340000

Area 2 Zone AllocationsLOCATION 442 – 449

10005678



User Code Allocations“LOCATION 462 – 477” is used to assign each user code to an area or multiple areas when theSolution Ultima 880 control panel has been partitioned. A number 0 – 3 is required to be enteredinto each of these locations to assign each user code holder to the areas they are required to operate.Multiple user codes can be allocated to the same areas.

Select the required areas that the user code holder is to operate and then add the options valuestogether from “Table 158: User Code Allocations” below (eg: If the user code is allocated to operateboth Area 1 and Area 2, program a 3 (ie. 1 + 2 = 3) into the required location relevant to their usercode allocation. If the user code is allocated only to Area 1, program their user code allocation as 1).

Option Allocated Areas

0 Not Allocated To An Area

1 Allocated To Area 1

2 Allocated To Area 2

3 Allocated To Area 1 + Area 2

Table 158: User Code Allocations

Location 462 Location 463 Location 464 Location 465

User Code 1 0 User Code 2 0 User Code 3 0 User Code 4 0







Partitioning 245


Setting Up and Programming Codepads For PartitioningOnly the CP5 Area Addressable (CP500A) and CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepads can beused when partitioning a Solution Ultima 880 control panel.

Setting Up The Master Partitioned Codepad As The Main Codepad.If you are using the CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepad as the main codepad whenpartitioning, you need to connect the codepad to the main codepad terminals (CP-, CP+, CLK andDATA). All DIP switches on the back of the codepad will need to be set to the ON position.

Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad As The Main CodepadIf you are not using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad as the main codepad of the partitionedsystem, you need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepad terminals (CP-, CP+, CLK andDATA). In addition to setting up the Area 1 Codepad, you will need to set DIP switch 1 on the backof the codepad into the ON position and enable Option 2 in “LOCATION 444” on page 241.

Setting Up An Area 1 CodepadIf you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 1 when using the CP5 Master Partitionedcodepad as the main codepad, you will need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepadterminals (CP-, CP+ and CLK) with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmableoutputs programmed as “6,0 – Area 1 Codepad Data”. DIP switch 1 on the back of the Area 1codepad will need to be in the ON position.

Setting Up An Area 2 CodepadIf you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 2, you will need to connect the Area 2Codepad to the main codepad terminals (CP-, CP+ and CLK) with the DATA terminal to beconnected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as “6,1 – Area 2 Codepad Data”. DIPswitch 2 on the back of the Area 2 codepad will need to be in the ON position.

Figure 16: DIP Switch Location On Back Of Codepad PCB



Codepad Connections For Partitioning - Examples

If the CP-5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepad is assigned toArea 1, DIP Switch 1 on the back of the remote codepad will needto be in the ON position. The following locations for Output 1will need to be programmed.

[LOCATION 380 = 6, 381 = 0]

If the CP-5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepad is assigned toArea 2, DIP Switch 2 on the back of the remote codepad will needto be in the ON position. The following locations for Output 1will need to be programmed.

[LOCATION 380 = 6, 381 = 1]

Figure 17: Connections For CP-5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) Codepad and CP-5 Area Addressable (CP500A) Codepad

The following DIP Switch settings and locations must beprogrammed for the two CP-5 Area Addressable (CP500A)codepads to function correctly.

AREA 1 CODEPADDIP Switch 1 on the back of the remote codepad will need to be inthe ON position. The following location will also need to beprogrammed.

[LOCATION 444, Option bit 2 must be enabled]

AREA 2 CODEPAD - (Output 1)DIP Switch 2 on the back of the remote codepad will need to be inthe ON position. The following locations for Output 1 will needto be programmed.

[LOCATION 380 = 6, 381 = 1]

Figure 18: Connections For Two CP-5 Eight Zone Area Addressable (CP500A) Codepads

Partitioning 247


RF Information


• RF Option Bit

• RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 – 8)

• RF Device Mapping (Devices 9 – 16)

• RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 1 – 8 Read Only)

• RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 9 – 16 Read Only)

RF Option Bit

LOCATION 527 0

Option Description

1 Sound Siren On RF Receiver Fail

2 Sound Siren On RF Receiver Tamper / Jamming

4 Unseal Zone That Fails Supervision (Only If Supervision Enabled)

8 Enable RF Jamming Monitoring

Table 159: RF Option Bit

Sound Siren On RF Receiver FailIf this option has been programmed, the horn speaker, piezo and strobe will operate when the RFreceiver fails to communicate to the control panel.

Sound Siren On RF Receiver Tamper / JammingIf this option has been programmed, the horn speaker, piezo and strobe will operate when the tamperswitch on the receiver has become open circuit or the receiver has picked up jamming signals from aRF device.

Unseal Zone That Fails SupervisionIf a wireless zone device fails to send a signal within the RF Supervision Time programmed inLOCATION 337 on page 187, the control panel will force the zone indicator on the codepad todisplay as unsealed.

Enable RF Jamming MonitoringIf this option has been enabled, the RF receiver will monitor the background RF levels. If this levelreaches a preset limit, the receiver will assume it is being jammed. This will generate a fault on thecodepad and will also send an “RF Jamming” report back to the monitoring station.

RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 – 8)

LOCATION 528 - 535 12345678

These locations allow you to allocate RF wireless devices 1 – 8 to any of the available 8 zones on thecontrol panel. More than one RF wireless device may be mapped to the same zone. Refer to“LOCATION 536 - 543” to map RF wireless devices 9 – 16 to any of the available 8 zones on thecontrol panel. At factory default, RF devices 1 – 8 are mapped separately to each of the available 8zones (eg: Device 1 is mapped to Zone 1, Device 2 is mapped to Zone 2 etc).

RF Device Mapping (Devices 9 – 16)

LOCATION 536 - 543 00000000

These locations allow you to allocate RF wireless devices 9 – 16 to any of the available 8 zones on thecontrol panel. More than one RF wireless device may be mapped to the same zone. Refer to“LOCATION 528 - 535” to map RF wireless devices 1 – 8 to any of the available 8 zones on thecontrol panel.

1

2

4

8



RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 1 – 8 Read Only)

LOCATION 801 - 808 00000000

These locations allow you to view the signal strength received for each of the RF wireless devices 1 –8 (eg: LOCATION 801 will display the signal strength of Device 1, LOCATION 802 will display thesignal strength of Device 2 etc). Zero is the lowest signal strength and eight is the highest signalstrength.

RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 9 – 16 Read Only)

LOCATION 809 - 816 00000000

These locations allow you to view the signal strength received for each of the RF wireless devices 9 –16 (eg: LOCATION 809 will display the signal strength of Device 9, LOCATION 810 will displaythe signal strength of Device 10 etc). Zero is the lowest signal strength and eight is the highest signalstrength.

RF Information 251


Optional Equipment


• 2 Channel/4 Channel Hand Held Transmitters 304 Mhz (RE012/RE013)

• 2 Channel Radio Interface (RE005)

• EDMSAT - Satellite Siren (SS914)

• Programming Key (CC891)

• Alarm Link Software (CC816)

• CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad (CP508)

• CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad (CP508L)

• CP5 Eight Zone Area Addressable Codepad (CP500A)


• Night Arm Station (CP105)

• Phone Controller (CC911)

• Hand Held Dialler Tester (DD901)

• Cellular Diallers

• PS100 Power Supply Module (PS100)

• TF008 Plug Pack (TF008)

• Solution Codepad Mimic Board (CC820)

• 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface (FA101)

• Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface (CC813)

Optional EquipmentEDM manufactures numerous accessories that can be used in conjunction with the Solution Ultima844/862/880 control panel. These optional pieces of equipment will enhance certain features thusmaking the system extremely flexible.

2 Channel/4 Channel Hand Held Transmitters 304 Mhz (RE012/RE013)These hand held radio Transmitters can be used in conjunction with the 304 Mhz RF Receiver(RE005) to remotely operate the system. Both hand held Transmitters have the ability to remotelyarm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 and activate remote panic alarms. The4 channel hand held Transmitter has the added ability to operate outputs such as garage doors,swimming pool pumps or outside lights etc.

2 Channel Radio Interface (RE005)The EDM 2 channel radio interface has been designed to allow customers to remotely operateSolution control panels and control two on-board relays. The interface may also be used as a standalone receiver, independent of a Solution control panel and used solely for remote control of externaldevices connected to the two on-board relays.

The interface’s operating frequency is 304 Mhz with the ability to store up to 120 radio remote codes.When connecting the interface to a Solution control panel, there is only a three wire connection inparallel to the codepad and Option 8 in “LOCATION 439” on page 230 needs to be programmed.

EDMSAT - Satellite Siren (SS914)The EDMSAT Satellite Siren is a totally self contained unit incorporating a high powered siren and aweatherproof strobe. A 1.2 AH sealed lead acid battery needs to be fitted. The EDMSAT requiresonly two wires for operation on which the charging of the battery and triggering of the siren andstrobe are carried out. This is done by pulse code modulating (PCM) the charging voltage. Anyattempt to tamper with the wiring or to substitute an alternative power source across the wiring willdisrupt the data transmission and the EDMSAT will activate immediately. When the EDMSATcarries out a battery test, the unit will sound for two seconds if the battery test fails. Refer to theOutput Event Type – EDMSAT - Satellite Siren on page 202 when programming a programmableoutput for the satellite siren.

Hand Held Programmer (CC814)

The hand held programmer is used to program the locations in the Solution Ultima844/862/880 control panel. The unit displays the actual location number and the data valuecurrently programmed. It comes complete with a one metre connecting cable and a socket for anexternal programming key. Refer to Programming With The Hand Held Programmer on page 105 formore information.

Programming Key (CC891)The programming key is a unique device that will store all programming information programmed inyour control panel once copied to the programming key. The programming key can hold all yourcommon configuration data such as monitoring station telephone numbers and zone reportingchannels etc.

Alarm Link Software (CC816)

This software package is designed to be used for programming the Solution Ultima844/862/880 control panel by either the direct connect method or the remote connect method viathe telephone line. All options and features can be accessed using this software as well as maintaininghistory and service reports. Refer to "LOCATION 180" on page 124 or 156 to enable this feature.Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 122 for more information on the remote connect methods.



CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad (CP508)

This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution range of control panels. This codepadprovides indications for up to 8 zones. This codepad cannot be used with the Solution Ultima880 control panel when partitioned.

CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad (CP508L)

This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution range of control panels with a fixed icondisplay. This codepad provides indications for up to 8 zones. This codepad cannot be used with theSolution Ultima 880 control panel when partitioned.

CP5 Eight Zone Area Addressable Codepad (CP500A)

This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution Ultima 880 control panels whenpartitioned. These codepads have DIP switches on the back of the codepad to select which area inpartitioning that the codepad belongs to. Refer to Setting Up and Programming Codepads ForPartitioning on page 246 and Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 247 for moreinformation.

CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad (CP500P)

This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution Ultima 880 control panels whenpartitioned. These codepads allow the entire system to be operated from the single codepad allowingthe user to toggle between separate areas by pressing the button. This means that there is noneed to have separate CP5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepads for each area. Refer to Setting Upand Programming Codepads For Partitioning on page 246 and Codepad Connections For Partitioningon page 247 for more information.

Night Arm Station (CP105)The night arm station incorporates a panic button and is designed to allow system operation from abedroom or sitting room to arm and disarm the system in STAY Mode 1. Refer to Option 8 in“LOCATION 439” on page 230 to enable the night arm station to operate with the system.

Phone Controller (CC911)The phone controller operates at a frequency of 1400 Hz and allows the user to remotely arm thesystem in AWAY Mode via the telephone. This phone controller can also be used to acknowledge aphone call from the control panel when the system is set up for domestic dialling.

Hand Held Dialler Tester (DD901)The hand held dialler tester simulates a base station for testing of the control panel's dialling functions.It communicates in most formats.

Cellular DiallersThe cellular dialler when connected to the control panel will send alarm information via the cellularphone network to the base station receiver when a land telephone line is not present or has beentampered with.

PS100 Power Supply Module (PS100)The PS100 Power Supply Module has been designed for applications requiring 13.8 volts DC atcurrents of up to 1 Amp and must be used in conjunction with the TF008 - 18 volt AC plug pack.

The unit comes complete with our standard, fully short circuit proof, power out and battery chargingterminals as well as a DC LED indicator and AC mains fail output. For situations requiring anuninterrupted power source, a rechargeable sealed lead-acid battery can be connected. In the event ofan AC mains failure, the power supply will switch to battery power without interrupting the loadbeing supplied.

Optional Equipment 255


TF008 Plug Pack (TF008)The TF008 plug packs have been designed to be used with the EDM control panels and the PS100Power Supply Module. The plug pack includes built in thermal fuses which under overload or faultconditions will blow and eliminate any possible fire threat due to excessive heat build up inside thecasing.

The TF008 plug pack incorporates a three wire flying lead that enables a mains earth connection to bemade between the equipment and the plug pack. This connection may be required for lightningprotection on equipment that is connected to phone lines or for safety reasons such as earthing ofmetal enclosures.

Solution Codepad Mimic Board (CC820)The Solution Codepad Mimic Board (CC820) has been designed to allow you to have a separateoutput indicator for each indicator found on the remote codepad. This will be useful to remotelydisplay system status information.

2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface (FA101)The 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface (FA101) has been designed to allow high quality 2 wire, 24 voltDC smoke detectors to be easily connected to the Solution range of control panels. The interfaceprovides the 24 volts required to power the smoke detector and also provides a relay output that isused to trigger the control panel. Multiple detectors may be connected to the same interface.

Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface (CC813)This interface was designed to allow simple interfacing of a momentary keyswitch or radio equipmentfor remote control operations to operate the control panel.

If the R/K terminal is used, a number of momentary keyswitches may be connected in parallel formultiple arm/disarm locations. The ON and OFF terminals can be used to directly interface to anyaccess control system.

The HOME terminal will force the system to arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1.

There is also a PANIC terminal that allows the customer to issue a panic alarm from a remotekeyswitch or hand held radio Transmitter.

This is handy if you require your system to be radio controlled and you would like to give yourcustomer total control via a hand held radio remote.



Terminals and Descriptions


• Terminal Definitions and Descriptions

• Glossary Of Terms

• Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Wiring Diagram

• Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Component Overlay

• Telecom Connection Diagrams

Terminal Definitions and Descriptions

Terminal Description

EARTH This terminal should be connected to the green wire on the TF008 Plug Pack that is internally connectedto the mains earth. Extensive lightning protection has been built into the control panel and this terminalwill have to be connected correctly if you are to take the best advantage of the protection provided.

18V AC These two terminals are plug on type, and are the termination point for the TF008 Plug Pack. Thevoltage of the plug pack being used must be 18 - 22 volts AC and rated at 1.3 Amps minimum for correctoperation.

+BATTERY-BATTERY

The + BATTERY connects to the red positive terminal of the battery and the - BATTERY connects tothe black negative terminal of the battery. The battery should be a 12 volt sealed lead acid rechargeabletype with a capacity of between 1.2 AH - 6.5 AH. The back-up battery is protected by a 3 Amp fuse.

The charging globe which is situated above the 3 Amp fuse will always be illuminated until the battery is100% charged.

GND+12VCLK

DATA

This group of terminals are the connection points for your system codepads. All system codepads shouldconnect in a parallel configuration back to these terminals. The only factor restricting the number ofcodepads that can be connected is the available power and its distribution. Each codepad has amaximum power requirement of 60 mA with all indicators illuminated, therefore this should be takeninto consideration when calculating your available continuous power. The total continuous external loadon the system should not exceed 1 Amp maximum.

STROUT 1+COM

This group of terminals are the output interface terminals. They can be configured to any combination ofthe functions available via the system programming options. They can be used for a variety of functionswith incredible flexibility. All outputs have a common terminal that is positive 12 volts and each outputis capable of sinking a maximum of 400 mA. Output 1 is defaulted to operate a horn speaker.

The outputs are protected by EDM's unique Integrated Protection System, [IPS]. This makes themextremely tolerant to abuse or incorrect wiring. It should be noted that each output is open collector andwill not source any current but can sink a maximum of 400 mA per output.

COMMN/O

These relay contacts are fully programmable as with the strobe and output 1. The relay is factorydefaulted as an alarm output (Sirens Running - Event Type 1,15).

The N/O contact is the connection point for the positive side of a DC siren such as a piezo screamer. Thenegative side of the DC siren needs to be connected to the GND terminal. A link (JP2) is provided onthe PCB for connecting the COM terminal to either GND or 12V. This link should be connected to +12Vas shown in "Figure 19: Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Wiring Diagram" on page 262. The relay is ratedat 1 Amp/30 VDC.

+12VZ4Z3

These terminals are zones three and four. Their common terminal is +12V. All normally closed contactsare to be wired in series with the EOL resistor and where normally open contacts are to be wired inparallel with the EOL resistor. The function of the zones and their response times are programmable viathe system programming options. If split EOL has been programmed, this will enable 24 hour zones orkeyswitch zones to be connected in parallel to zones three and four to act as zones seven and eight.

+12VGND

These two terminals are for power to detectors and other equipment. They are fuse protected by a 1 ampfuse.

Z2Z1

+12V

These terminals are zones one and two. Their common terminal is +12V. All normally closed contactsare to be wired in series with the EOL resistor and where normally open contacts are to be wired inparallel with the EOL resistor. The function of the zones and their response times are programmable viathe system programming options. If split EOL has been programmed, this will enable 24 hour zones orkeyswitch zones to be connected in parallel to zones one and two to act as zones five and six



Glossary Of Terms

Term Description

Alarm Condition Is when your alarm system is armed and one of the detection devices are violated. A 24 hour zone(eg. Smoke detector) may trigger when your system is armed or disarmed.

Answering MachineBypass

Answering machine bypass has been incorporated so that it is possible to make a connection withthe control panel for remote arming or remote programming operations when there is an answeringmachine or facsimile machine on the same telephone line.

Armed(System ON)

When the system is in a state ready to accept alarms.

Automatic Arming Automatic arming allows the system to automatically arm at the same time each day in AWAYMode or STAY Mode 1.

Automatic Disarming Automatic disarming allows the system to automatically disarm at the same time each day inAWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.

AWAY or # This is the button on your codepad used to execute any given command.

AWAY Mode Is the mode used to arm your system when you leave your premises.

Codepad The codepad allows you to perform all functions such as arming, disarming and programming ofyour alarm system.

Day Alarm Day alarm allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmedstate.

Detectors Are devices connected to your alarm system used to cause an alarm condition. Some commonforms of detection devices are; passive infrared, smoke, photo electric beams, reed switches andvibration sensors.

Dialler Is a device that is used for communicating to a monitoring station, mobile phone or pocket pageretc.

Disarmed Is when your system is in a state that will not accept alarms except for 24 hour zones.

Dual Reporting Dual reporting allows your control panel to send alarm signals in two different reporting formats(EG: The control panel may send to a monitoring station as well as a mobile phone etc or even totwo different monitoring stations).

Dynamic BatteryTesting

Is a feature used to monitor and test the condition of your backup battery.

EDMSAT(Satellite Siren)

Is a self contained siren unit complete with flashing blue strobe light and a backup battery. Itoffers a higher level of security for your alarm system.

Entry Time orEntry Delay

Is the time allowed after entering your premises, to disarm your system before an alarm occurs.

Entry Warning Is the beeping from your codepad during entry time to remind you to disarm your system.

Terminals and Descriptions 259


Term Description

Exit Time orExit Delay

Is the amount of time you have to leave your premises after you have armed your system.

External Equipment Is any device connected to your system such as detectors, codepads and sirens.

Forced Arming Is a situation where your alarm system is permitted to be armed when one or more zones areunsealed.

Handover Delay When your system is armed and zone one is violated, the entry delay starts timing. If zone two isthen violated the entry delay time is handed over to zone two and so on through zones three andfour. This is known as sequential hand over delay.

Hand Held RadioRemote Control

Hand held radio Transmitters can be used to arm and disarm your system or cause a panic alarm.

Lockout Dialler Lockout dialler means that the dialler will only activate once per zone per arming cycle.

Lockout Siren Lockout siren means that the sirens will only activate once per zone per arming cycle.

Master Code Is a numerical code used for arming and disarming the system as well as allowing access to allfunctions that are programmable through the codepad.

Monitoring Station Is a secure location where a digital receiver monitors numerous alarm systems and deciphers theiralarm transmission reports so that the operator can advise the appropriate authorities to takeimmediate action.

Panic This is a type of alarm raised by you to indicate to the monitoring station that there is anemergency situation at your premises.

Phone Controller Is a device used for arming your system via the telephone line. It is also used to acknowledgedomestic alarm reports.

Partitioning The Solution Ultima 880 control panel may be set up to transform your single control paneland split the system into two separate controllable areas. Partitioning is extremely useful whenyou wish to secure sheds, dual occupancy dwellings, granny flats, shops and offices.

Radio Remote User Codes A radio user code that is used to arm and disarm the system remotely via hand held Transmitters inAWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1. Remote panic alarms are also allowed.

Sealed Refers to a zones status. If a zone is sealed, the detection devices are not violated and the zoneindicator will be extinguished (ie. a reed switch is closed or a detector is on stand by waiting for anintrusion).

Sensor Watch Sensor watch gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may havestopped working. This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed timeperiod.

Silent Alarm When programming your system, it is possible to have an individual zone for silent alarm. Thismeans that when the zone is violated your alarm system will communicate with the monitoringstation without sounding the sirens. This can only be programmed by your installer.



Term Description

STAY Mode 1 Is a condition that automatically isolates certain zones when your system is armed in STAY Mode1. These zones can only be programmed by your installer.

STAY Mode 2 Is a condition that automatically isolates certain zones when your system is armed in STAY Mode2. These zones are programmed by the Master Code holder.

Telco Arming Sequence Telco arming is a feature that automatically diverts your telephone number to another telephonewhen the system is armed in AWAY Mode - same as using call forwarding.

Telco Disarm Sequence Telco disarm automatically un-diverts your telephone upon disarming your system.

Unsealed Refers to zone status. If a zone is unsealed, the detection devices are violated and the zoneindicator will be illuminated (ie. a reed switch is open or a detector has noted an intrusion).

User Code A numerical code that is used to arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 orSTAY Mode 2.

Zones A monitored input used to trigger an alarm condition. A zone may be set up only to activate analarm when the system is armed or to operate irrespective of the system being armed or disarmed.

24 Hour Zone A monitored input where tamper switches and emergency switches may be connected. If at anytime, (whether your system is armed or disarmed) one of these switches is violated, an alarmcondition will be generated.



Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Wiring Diagram

Figure 19: Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Wiring Diagram



Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Component Overlay

Figure 20: Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Component Overlay



Telecom Connection Diagrams

Figure 21: Telecom Connection Diagrams For Solution Ultima 844/862/880



Appendices


• Telephone Anti-Jamming

• Test Reports Only When Armed

Appendix A

Telephone Anti-JammingThere are many companies today importing American designed products that claim to haveAnti-Jamming and believe it or not, they push this feature as if it were a major break through incontrol panel technology. Well this in fact is not the case at all as most control panels havesome sort of Anti-Jamming feature. We can go as far back as the early 1980's where even the678 diallers incorporated a form of Anti-Jamming as a standard programmable option.

The important thing to note is that as most American designed products are primarily aimed attheir local market and telephone networks, when they are imported to Australia their anti-jamming function does not perform as it should.

To clear up just what anti-jamming is and how it works needs some understanding ofTelephone Networks. In America either of the two parties (ie. the one who initiated the call orthe one receiving the call) can clear the line by placing the hand piece back on the hook. If youpick up the hand piece again, dial tone will be received and you will be able to make a new callimmediately. This is not so here in Australia.

In Australia, only the calling party can immediately terminate the call. If you receive a callfrom someone and hang up on them, picking the hand piece back up again to make a new callonly reconnects you to the original caller. It will not be possible to make another call until theoriginal caller hangs up or you hang up phone for ninety seconds or longer. So you seeAustralia is very different and needs a special form of anti-jamming to suit our telephonenetwork.

There are control panels on the market that after making a few call attempts which fail simplyhang up and wait for ninety seconds or so, in an attempt to clear the jamming incoming call.This may work in some instances where the caller is not a genuine burglar and is notdeliberately trying to jam the control panel. With this simple method of hanging up for ninetyseconds we have not only delayed the alarm signal for this time but also the time taken for theoriginal failed call attempts which could easily total 4 minutes. This is bad enough in its ownright but even more disturbing is the fact that the initial failed call attempts allow for theestablishment of an audio connection between the would be burglar and the control panel.Anyone with a little knowledge of alarm systems will be able to actually trick the dialler intothinking it is talking to a base station thus actually clearing the alarm signal. Pretty frighteningwhen you thought the control panel you were using and recommending to your customers issupposed to have anti-jamming.

At Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited we take anti-jamming very seriouslyand have in fact devoted a great deal of time and money researching this problem. Ourengineers have come up with the best possible anti-jamming procedure known and patentedaccordingly {Patent Number 571994}.

Our procedure is very simple and effective because we never answer the burglars phone calland the Telecom Network will automatically clear an unanswered call in approximately ninetyseconds. This time will be even shorter if the call is originated through the Mobile-NetNetwork where it will most likely be in the case of a true burglary.

Once the control panel detects that the phone line has stopped ringing it immediately loops theline and makes its call therefore sending its alarm message successfully. The line is alsoautomatically disconnected from the telephones within the protected premises immediately onan alarm condition by the control panel to further confuse the burglar and eliminate thepossibility of the burglar answering the call. As you can see, our method of anti-jamming willin the worst possible case delay the alarm signal by ninety seconds but even more importantlywill never allow for an audio connection between the burglar and the control panel.



All dialling products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited haveincorporated this true anti-jamming feature as standard since 1985 and we do not consider it asan option but a must in any professional security system.

True anti-jamming can only be found in products produced by Electronics Design andManufacturing Pty Limited and any other manufacturer can only offer second best due to ourpatent on this very unique and effective procedure.

Appendix B

Test Reports Only When ArmedThe Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel allows for test reports to be sent tothe base station receiver to verify that the dialler functional. So what you might say, as mostalarm diallers allow you to do this.

The one problem with this is that installations that report opening and closing reports willgenerally also send a test report each day. This call is unnecessary, as a successful opening andclosing report means that the dialler is functioning correctly.

The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel allows you to save time and moneyby providing test reports only while the system is in the armed state.

Program "LOCATION 4" on page 231 with Option 1 (Send test reports only if the system isarmed), and then set the test report time to be in the middle of the day. During Monday toFriday when the premises are generally open and the system disarmed a test report will not besent. However, on the weekend, the premises will be closed and the system armed, so a testreport will be sent at the programmed time thus verifying the operation of the dialler.

At first glance this may not seem to be a big deal but lets do a few sums and you will see justwhere savings can be made.

Let us assume that the customer wants, needs or has test reports programmed for once a day aswell as opening and closing reports. This means that at least three phone calls will be madeeach week day and one call on Saturday and one call on Sunday.

By using the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel you will be able to eliminatefive calls per week. This means that over one week you will save your customer $1.25 andover one year you will save them $65.00.

Not a bad saving, and remember these figures are for local calls only.

Turning the table slightly, a control room with lets say 1000 customers sending the abovementioned reports, can expect to receive some 884,000 phone calls ($221,000 assuming localcalls) just for reporting opening, closing and test reports over a 12 month period.

If you use the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel, you can effectively cut thecalls to 624,000 per year (at a value of $156,000 assuming local calls), a saving of $65,000. Ifwe now assume that for each call one line is printed on the logging printer, and that one page isfilled per 60 calls. You will be able to save 4333 sheets of paper per year and at approximately$45 per box this becomes a considerable saving.

As you can see using the Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panel will save youmoney, your customer money and will help conserve our natural resources, in fact, the onlypeople who don't like this feature is Telecom.

Appendices 267


Specifications


• Warranty Statement

• Specifications

• Software Version Number

• Advice To Users

• New Zealand Telepermit Notes

Warranty StatementElectronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited warrants this product to be free fromdefects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of manufactureas indicated by the date stamp and /or the serial number on the product.

Defective units returned by the purchaser at their own expense during this period will berepaired or replaced at the option of the manufacturer. The repair or replacement will be free ofcharge provided that the defects were not incurred during shipping or handling, or the damagewas not due to causes beyond the control of Electronics Design and Manufacturing PtyLimited, such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical shock or damage arising out ofabuse, alteration or improper application of the equipment.

Year 2000 ComplianceThis notice is to confirm that all Solution Ultima 844/862/880 control panels are notsusceptible to, or can be corrupted by the “Year 2000 Millennium Bug”.

To date, all Solution products that incorporate time keeping functions employ a rotating 100year calendar. This means that the Solution products do not use the century in any timekeeping algorithms, only the year within the century.



SpecificationsTemperature Range: 0 – 45 Degrees Celsius

Humidity 10% - 95%

Power Source: TF008 Plug Pack – 240 Volt / 18 Volt AC @ 1.3Amp

Stand-By Current: 65 mA

Current Draw In Alarm Condition: 115 mA

Current Draw With No Alarm and Codepad Fitted: 105 mA

Back-Up Battery: Ah / 12 Volt DC Rechargeable Sealed Lead AcidBattery

Dimensions: 306 mm x 262 mm x 84 mm (Packed In Carton)

Weight: 2.5 Kg

Supplier Code: N771

New Zealand Telepermit: PTC 211/98/083 – Solution Ultima 880

PTC 211/98/084 – Solution Ultima 862

PTC 211/98/085 – Solution Ultima 844

Software Version Number

LOCATION 999 1.00

When using the Hand Held Programmer (CC814), you have the ability to display the softwareversion number of the control panel. Refer to Command 999 - Display Panel Type OrSoftware Version Number on page 117 for more information.

Advice To UsersThe Austel permit that has been issued for this product is subject to the following conditions.

• The Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Control Panel may only be powered by anEDM TF008 Plug Pack (Approval Number Q92128).

Specifications 271


New Zealand Telepermit Notes• The grant of a telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance of

responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions.

• This equipment shall not be used in any manner that could constitute a nuisance to otherTelecom customers.

• Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged andarrange for its disposal or repair.

• The send level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this there may becircumstances where the performance is less than optimal. Before reporting suchoccurrences as faults, please check the line with a standard telepermitted telephone anddo not report a fault if the telephone performance is satisfactory.

• This device is equipped with pulse dialling while the Telecom standard is DTMF tonedialling. There is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulsedialling.

Use of dialling, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment,may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition.Should such problems occur, the user should NOT contact the Telecom Faults Service.

• This equipment is set up to carry out test calls at pre-determined times. Such test callswill interrupt any other calls that may be set up on the line at the same time. The timingset for such test calls should be discussed with the installer.

The timing set for test calls from this equipment may be subject to drift. If this provesto be inconvenient and your calls are interrupted, then the problem of timing should bediscussed with the equipment installer. The matter should NOT be reported as a fault toTelecom Faults Service.

• This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111Emergency Service.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute anuisance to other Telecom customers.

• In the event of any problem with this device, the systems battery, AC mains supply andtelephone line should be disconnected. The user is to then arrange with the supplier ofthe device to make the necessary repairs.

Should the matter be reported to Telecom as a wiring fault and the fault be proven to bedue to this product, a call-out charge will be incurred.



Solution Ultima 844Programming Sheets

Location 000 – 015 Page 139Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1

Location 016 – 031 Page 139Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1

Location 032 Page 140Handshake Tone For Receiver 1

Location 033 Page 141Transmission Format For Receiver 1

Location 034 – 039 Page 141Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1






Location 080 Page 145Dialling Format

Location 081 – 112 Page 145Reserved

Location 113 –142 Page 146Telco Arming Sequence

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Location 143 – 158 Page 147Telco Disarming Sequence

Location 159 – 174 Page 147Call Back Telephone Number

Location 175 Page 148Ring Count

Location 176 Page 149Telephone Line Fault Options

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 = HI-LO Handshake (Contact ID) 4 = No Handshake Required2 = 1400 Hz (TX @ 1900 Hz) 5 = Pager3 = 2300 Hz (Low Speed Sescoa)

1

1 = Contact ID 5 = Basic Pager2 = 4 + 2 Express 6 = Reserved3 = FSK 300 Baud 7 = Reserved4 = Domestic 8 = Reserved

1

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


1

1


0 0 0 0 0 0

11 = Australian DTMF (5 Digits/Second) 4 = International DTMF2 = Australian Decadic 5 = Reversed Decadic3 = Alternate DTMF & Decadic (AUST) 6 = Alternate DTMF & Reversed Decadic

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

15 = Answering Machine Bypass 114 = Answering Machine Bypass 2

8

1 = Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails 2 = Sound Speaker, Bell & Strobe When System Is Armed 4 = Sound Speaker, Bell & Strobe When System Is Disarmed 8 = Reserved

0



Location 177 Page 153Dialler Options 1



Location 180 Page 124/156Alarm Link Options

Location 181 – 184 Page 158Installer Code

Location 185 – 264 Page 159User Codes







15 15 15 15 0

User Code Priority








1 = Enable Dialler Reporting Functions2 = Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone4 = Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed8 = Enabled - Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled – CCITT V21

9

1 = Send Open/Close Reports Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred2 = Send Open/Close Reports When In STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 24 = Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete8 = Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 Seconds To 55 Seconds

0

1 = Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit/Second2 = Reserved4 = Change Decadic Dialling To 60/408 = Reserved

0

3

1 = Enable Upload/Download Via Alarm Link2 = Enable Alarm Link Call Back4 = Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm8 = Use External Modem Module (CC811) For Alarm Link Operations

1 2 3 4

Solution Ultima 844 Programming Sheets 275


Location 265 Page 164Day Alarm Zones

Location 266 Page 166EOL Resistor Value

Location 267 – 322 Page 170Zones


2 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1


1 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1 12 0 0 1 12 1 1


12 0 0 1 12 1 1 13 0 0 1 12 1 1 9 0 0 1 12 1 1

ZoneType

Zone PulseCount


ZoneOption 1

ZoneOption 2

ReportCode

DiallerOptions

Zone TypesThere are fifteen different zone types to choose from. Each zone contains eight locations. Zones 1 to 4 are fullyprogrammable whereas zones 5 to 8 may only be programmed to any 24 hour zone type.


1 = Zone 1 4 = Zone 32 = Zone 2 8 = Zone 4

0

0 = No End Of Line Resistor 9 = 10K1 = 1K 10 = 12K2 = 1K5 11 = 22K3 = 2K2 12 = Reserved4 = 3K3 13 = Reserved5 = 3K9 14 = Split EOL (3K3/6K8) With Tamper (1K)6 = 4K7 15 = Split EOL (3K3/6K8) – Six Burglary7 = 5K6 Zones and Two 24 Hour Zones8 = 6K8

15

Zone Type Description Zone Type Description0 Instant 8 24 Hour Hold-Up1 Handover 9 24 Hour Tamper2 Delay-1 10 Reserved3 Delay-2 11 Keyswitch4 Reserved 12 24 Hour Burglary5 Reserved 13 24 Hour Fire6 24 Hour Medical 14 Chime Only7 24 Hour Panic 15 Zone Not Used



Zone Pulse Count SettingsThe pulse count settings for each zone can be programmed between 0 - 15.

Zone Pulse Count TimeZone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the number of pulses must register.

20 ms Loop Response TimeZone Pulse Count Time


0 0.5 Second 8 20 Seconds1 1 Second 9 30 Seconds2 2 Seconds 10 40 Seconds3 3 Seconds 11 50 Seconds4 4 Seconds 12 60 Seconds5 5 Seconds 13 90 Seconds6 10 Seconds 14 120 Seconds7 15 Seconds 15 200 Seconds

Table 162: Zone Pulse Count Time Options

Zone Options 1 Zone Options 2Option Description Option Description

1 Lockout Siren/Lockout Dialler 1 Isolated In STAY Mode 12 Delay Alarm Reporting 2 Zone Isolation Allowed4 Silent Alarm 4 Forced Arming Allowed8 Sensor Watch 8 Enable Zone Restore Report

Table 163: Zone Options 1 Table 164: Zone Options 2

Zone Dialler Options

Option Description0 No Report Required1 Receiver 12 Receiver 24 Receiver 1 + 28 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails


Zone DescriptionsUse this table as a reference to indicate what each zone is connected to.

Table 166: Zone Descriptions

Zone Description Zone Description1 52 63 74 8



Location 323 Page 181Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren

Location 324 Page 182Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler

Location 325 – 326 Page 184Zone Status - Zone Tamper Report

Location 327 – 328 Page 184Zone Status - Walk Test Report

Location 329 – 330 Page 185Zone Status - Bypass Reports

Location 331 – 332 Page 185Zone Status - Trouble Reports

Location 333 – 334 Page 186Zone Status - Sensor WatchReports

Location 335 Page 186Zone Status - Alarm Restore Code

Location 336 Page 186Zone Status Reporting Options

Location 337 Page 187RF Supervision Time

Location 338 – 339 Page 187RF Low Battery Report

Location 340 – 341 Page 188RF Receiver Trouble Report

Location 342 – 343 Page 188RF Receiver Trouble RestoreReport

Location 344 Page 188RF Dialler Options

Location 345 – 346 Page 189Open/Close Reports

Location 347 Page 189Open/Close Reporting Options

Location 348 Page 190Codepad Duress Report

Location 349 – 350 Page 190Codepad Panic Report

Location 351 – 352 Page 191Codepad Fire Report

3

6

Location 325 Zone Tamper ReportLocation 326 Zone Tamper Restore Report

0 0

Location 327 Walk Test Enable ReportLocation 328 Walk Test Disable Report

0 0

Location 329 Zone Bypass ReportLocation 330 Zone Bypass Restore Report

9 8

2 3Location 331 Zone Trouble ReportLocation 332 Zone Trouble Restore Report

4 5Location 333 Sensor Watch ReportLocation 334 Sensor Watch Restore Report

14

1

0 = No Report Required1 = Receiver 12 = Receiver 24 = Receiver 1 + 28 = Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails

0Location 337 Increments Of 6 Hours (0 – 90 Hours)

6 8Location 338 RF Low Battery ReportLocation 339 RF Low Battery Restore Report

7 9Location 340 RF Receiver Trouble Report (Tens Digit)Location 341 RF Receiver Trouble Report (Units Digit)

Location 342 RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report (Tens Digit)Location 343 RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report (Units Digit)

7 11


1

11 12Location 345 Opening ReportLocation 346 Closing Report

1


6

7 15

7 14



Location 353 – 354 Page 191Codepad Medical Report

Location 355 Page 192Codepad Reporting Options

Location 356 – 357 Page 192System Status – Fuse Fail Report

Location 358 – 359 Page 192System Status – Fuse Fail Restore Report

Location 360 – 361 Page 193System Status – AC Fail Report

Location 362 – 363 Page 193System Status - AC Fail Restore Report

Location 364 – 365 Page 194System Status - Low Battery Report

Location 366 – 367 Page 194System Status - Low Battery Restore Report

Location 368 – 370 Page 195System Status – Access Denied

Location 371 Page 196System Status Reporting Options

Location 372 – 378 Page 197Test Reporting Time

Location 379 Page 197Test Reporting Dialler Options

Location 380 – 409 Page 200OutputConfigurations

7 13


1

10 3

10 8

10 2

10 7

10 1

10 6

Location 368 Code RetriesLocation 369 Reporting Code – Tens DigitLocation 370 Reporting Code – Units Digit

6 7 12

1


Location 372 Actual Hour Of The Day (Tens Digit)Location 373 Actual Hour Of The Day (Units Digit)Location 374 Actual Minute Of The Day (Tens Digit)Location 375 Actual Minute Of The Day (Units Digit)Location 376 Test Report Code (Tens Digit)Location 377 Test Report Code (Units Digit)Location 378 Repeat Interval In Days

0 0 0 0 7 1 0

1


Location 380 - 385 Location 386 - 391 Location 392 – 397Output 1 1 14 0 0 0 0 Output 2 2 7 10 2 1 5 Strobe 2 0 6 4 0 8

Default ForHorn Speaker









Location 410 – 411 Page 216Entry Timer 1


Location 414 – 415 Page 217Exit Time

Location 416 – 417 Page 217Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode

Location 418 – 419 Page 217Delay Alarm Reporting Time

Location 420 - 421 Page 218Sensor Watch Time

Location 422 Page 218Codepad Lockout Time

Location 423 Page 219Siren Run Time

Location 424 Page 219Siren Sound Rate (Slow <-Sound-> Fast)

Location 425 Page 220Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time

Location 426 – 429 Page 220

Auto Arming Time

Location 430 - 433 Page 221

Auto Disarming Time

Location 434 Page 221Kiss-Off Wait Time

Location 435 Page 221Speaker Beep Volume

Location 436 Page 227System Options 1




Location 410 Increments Of 1 Second (0 - 15 Sec’s)Location 411 Increments Of 16 Seconds (0 - 240 Sec’s)

4 1


8 2


12 3

0 0Location 416 Increments Of 1 Second (0 - 15 Sec’s)Location 417 Increments Of 16 Seconds (0 - 240 Sec’s)


Location 420 Increments Of Days (Tens Digit)Location 421 Increments Of Days (Units Digit)

0 0

0Location 422 Increments Of 10 Seconds

5Location 423 Increments Of 1 Minute (0 – 15 Min’s)

7

Location 425 Increments Of 5 Minutes 1

Location 426 Hour Of The Day (Tens Digit)Location 427 Hour Of The Day (Units Digit)Location 428 Minute Of The Day (Tens Digit)Location 429 Minute Of The Day (Units Digit)

0 0 0 0


0 0 0 0

3Location 434 Increments Of 500 ms (500 ms – 8 Sec’s)

13Location 435 0 = No Beeps / 15 = Loudest Beeps

1

1 = Enable EDM Smart Lockout 2 = Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker 4 = Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm/Disarm 8 = Assign Button 4 On Transmitter To Operate STAY Mode 1

1 = Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent 2 = Enable Codepad Fire To Be Silent 4 = Enable Codepad Medical To Be Silent 8 = Enable Access Denied To Be Silent

0

1 = Enable AC Fail In 1 Hour 2 = Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication 4 = Enable Pulse Count Handover 8 = Enable Handover Delay To Be Sequential

8

0

1 = Allow The Panel To Power Up In The Disarmed State 2 = Enable Arm/Disarm Tracking On Power Up 4 = Enable Internal Crystal To Keep Time 8 = Enable Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface Or Night Arm Station



Location 440 Page 231Consumer Options 1



Location 443 Page 234Radio Input Options

Location 478 – 525 Page 127Domestic Telephone Numbers

Location 526Reserved

Location 527 Page 250RF Options

Location 528 – 535 Page 250RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 – 8)


Location 801 – 808 Page 251RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 1 – 8 Read Only)


Location 900 Page 118Disable Factory Default

Location 901 – 904 Page 222System Time

Location 905 – 910 Page 223System Date

1 = Send Test Reports Only If The System Is Armed 2 = Send Test Report After Siren Reset 4 = Enable Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 8 = Enable The STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status

0

1 = Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode 2 = Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 & STAY Mode 2 4 = Enable Single Button Disarming From STAY Mode 1 & STAY Mode 2 8 = Enable Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm

2

5

1 = Enable Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps 2 = Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 4 = Enable Operation Of Siren & Strobe In STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 8 = Enable Zone Tamper Alarms To Be Silent

1 = DS 304 Mhz Receiver (RF3212) 2 = Latching Keyswitch Input 3 = Momentary Keyswitch Input 4 = Reserved

0

0

0

1 = Sound Siren On RF Receiver Fail 2 = Sound Siren On RF Receiver Tamper / Jamming 4 = Unseal Zone That Fails Supervision (Only If Supervision Enabled) 8 = Enable RF Jamming Monitoring

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 = Defaulting Enabled15 = Defaulting Disabled

0


0 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1

Location 905 Day Of The Month (Tens Digit)Location 906 Day Of The Month (Units Digit)Location 907 Month Of The Year (Tens Digit)Location 908 Month Of The Year (Units Digit)Location 909 Year (Tens Digit)Location 910 Year (Units Digit)
















0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0





0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


1


1

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


1

1


0 0 0 0 0 0


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


8


0















15 15 15 15 0

User Code Priority









9


0


0

3


1 2 3 4







2 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1


1 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1 0 0 0 1 14 1 1


0 0 0 1 14 1 1 13 0 0 1 12 1 1 9 0 0 1 12 1 1

ZoneType

Zone PulseCount


ZoneOption 1

ZoneOption 2

ReportCode

DiallerOptions

Zone TypesThere are fifteen different zone types to choose from. Each zone contains eight locations. Zones 1 to 6 are fullyprogrammable whereas zones 7 and 8 may only be programmed to any 24 hour zone type.



0


15























3

6


0 0


0 0


9 8



14

1






7 11


1


1


6

7 15

7 14
















7 13


1

10 3

10 8

10 2

10 7

10 1

10 6


6 7 12

1



0 0 0 0 7 1 0

1























Auto Arming Time


Auto Disarming Time








4 1


8 2


12 3




0 0



7



0 0 0 0


0 0 0 0



1



0


8

0










Location 527 Page 250RF Options









0


2

5



0

0

0


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


0


0 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1

















0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0





0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


1


1

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


1

1


0 0 0 0 0 0


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


8


0















15 15 15 15 0

User Code Priority









9


0


0

3


1 2 3 4







2 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1


1 0 0 1 14 1 1 1 0 0 1 14 1 1 0 0 0 1 14 1 1


0 0 0 1 14 1 1 0 0 0 1 14 1 1 9 0 0 1 12 1 1

ZoneType

Zone PulseCount


ZoneOption 1

ZoneOption 2

ReportCode

DiallerOptions

Zone TypesThere are fifteen different zone types to choose from. Each zone contains eight locations. Zones 1 to 8 are fullyprogrammable.



0


15























3

6


0 0


0 0


9 8



14

1






7 11


1


1


6

7 15

7 14
















7 13


1

10 3

10 8

10 2

10 7

10 1

10 6


6 7 12

1



0 0 0 0 7 1 0

1























Auto Arming Time


Auto Disarming Time








4 1


8 2


12 3




0 0



7



0 0 0 0


0 0 0 0



1



0


8

0








Location 444 Page 241Partitioning Options 1

Location 445 Page 242Partitioning Options 2

Location 446 – 453 Page 243Zone Allocations For Area 1

Location 454 – 461 Page 243Zone Allocations For Area 2

Location 462 – 477 Page 245User Code Allocations



Location 527 Page 250RF Option


0


2

5



0

0

1 = Enable First To Open/Last To Close Reporting 2 = Enable Main Codepad To Display Data Only For Area 1 4 = Allow Resetting Of Sirens From Either Area 8 = Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When Using Telephone Line

1 = Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2 2 = Enable “Usercode + 0 + AWAY” Function To Arm/Disarm Both Areas 4 = Reserved 8 = Reserved

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Location 462 Location 463 Location 464 Location 465Areas For User #1 0 Areas For User #2 0 Areas For User #3 0 Areas For User #4 0




0

0











1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


0


0 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1




2

2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface .............................. 25624 Hour Zone ........................................................... 261

4

4 + 2 Reporting Format ............................................ 133

A

AC MainsFail In 1 Hour....................................................... 229Ignore Fail Indication ........................................... 229Report .................................................................. 193Restore Report...................................................... 193

AC Mains Failure.......................................................54Access Codes

Installer Code ....................................................... 158User Code Priority Level ...................................... 161User Codes........................................................... 159

Access DeniedCode Retries......................................................... 195

Access Denied To Be Silent ..................................... 228Alarm Condition ...................................................... 259Alarm Link ...................................................... 124, 156

Direct Connect ..................................................... 123Enable Alarm Link Call Back ....................... 124, 156Enable Upload/Download ............................. 124, 156External Modem Module ...................................... 124Initiate Modem Call................................................96Remote Connect ................................................... 122Remote Connect With Call Back Verification ....... 123Remote Connect With Customer Control .............. 122Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification .. 123Terminate Session If Report Pending ............ 124, 156

Alarm Link Software................................................ 254Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm ............................. 232Alarm Reporting ...................................................... 175Answering Machine Bypass.............................. 148, 259

Only When Armed ............................................... 153Area Display Indicator ....................................... 36, 237Area On/Off Indicator ........................................ 35, 237Armed...................................................................... 259Arming

Both Areas At Same Time ................................ 76, 92In AWAY Mode............................................... 40, 93In STAY Mode 1.............................................. 42, 93In STAY Mode 2.............................................. 45, 94Single Button Operation ....................................... 232Via Telephone .............................................. 100, 153

Audible Indicators...................................30, 34, 37, 239Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 ..................................... 231Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer................................... 220Auto Arming Time ................................................... 220Auto Disarming Time............................................... 221Automatic Stepping Of Locations ............................. 115AUX Indicator ................................................... 36, 238AWAY Indicator.................................................. 28, 31AWAY Mode........................................................... 259

Arming............................................................. 40, 93Disarming ..............................................................41

AWAY or # ............................................................. 259

B

Basic Pager ..............................................................134Basic Pager Reporting ..............................................134Battery Testing.........................................................259Bell Test.....................................................................94Bypass Reports.........................................................185

C

Call Back Telephone Number ...................................147Cellular Diallers .......................................................255Code Retries.............................................................195Codepad ...................................................................259

Buzzer..................................................................200Buzzer Tone Change...............................................97Connections When Partitioning.............................247CP5 Eight Zone Area Addressable Codepad..........255CP5 Master Partitioned .........................................255Determine Area ......................................................97DIP Switches........................................................246

Codepad Duress.................................................. 47, 190Codepad Duress Report ............................................190Codepad Extinguish Mode........................................232Codepad Fire...............................................47, 191, 228Codepad Fire Report.................................................191Codepad Fire To Be Silent........................................228Codepad Indicators

Area Display................................................... 36, 237Area On/Off ................................................... 35, 237Audible ...............................................30, 34, 37, 239AUX............................................................... 36, 238AWAY............................................................. 28, 31FAULT ...............................................29, 33, 37, 238MAINS ...............................................29, 32, 37, 238OFF Indicator/Zone Sealed .....................................33ON Indicator/Zone In Alarm...................................33PARTIAL....................................................... 36, 237Programming Mode ................................................33STAY............................................................... 29, 32System Disarmed....................................................32Zone....................................................28, 31, 35, 236

Codepad Lockout Time ............................................218Codepad Medical.........................................47, 191, 228Codepad Medical Report ..........................................191Codepad Medical To Be Silent .................................228Codepad Panic.............................................47, 190, 228Codepad Panic Report ..............................................190Codepad Panic To Be Silent .....................................228Codepad Reporting Options......................................192Codepads

CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad ...............................28CP5 Eight Zone Master Partitioned .........................31CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad...........................236

Command 958 - Enable/Disable Zone Status.............108Command 959 - Test Programming Key ...................109Command 960 - Exit Installer's Programming Mode..110Command 961 - Reset Control Panel Back To Factory

Default .................................................................110Command 962 - Copy Control Panel Memory To

Programming Key.................................................111Command 963 - Copy From Programming Key To

Control Panel........................................................112Command 964 - Erase Programming Key..................113



Command 965 - Set Up Domestic Dialling ............... 114Command 966 - Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping 115Command 999 - Display Panel Type/Software Version

............................................................................ 117Communciation Fail................................................... 54Component Overlay ................................................. 263Connections Of Split EOL Using N/O Contacts........ 168Connections Of Split EOL With Tamper Circuit....... 167Consumer Options 1 ................................................ 231

Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 ................................. 231Enable STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status

........................................................................ 231Send Test Report After Siren Reset....................... 231Send Test Reports Only If Armed......................... 231

Consumer Options 2 ................................................ 232Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm ......................... 232Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode ........................ 232Single Button Arming .......................................... 232Single Button Disarming ...................................... 232

Consumer Options 3Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps ................................. 233Operation Of Siren & Strobe In STAY Mode........ 233Use Digit 3 For Duress Instead Of Digit 9 ............ 233

Contact ID Format ................................................... 130Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed...................... 230Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key.. 111Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel ...... 112

D

Date and Time .............................................. 53, 89, 223Day Alarm........................................................164, 259

Latching............................................................... 164Operation............................................................. 165Resetting.............................................................. 164Status Indicator .................................................... 231Turning On/Off ...................................................... 95

Decadic Dialling To 60/40 ....................................... 155Defaulting The Control Panel............................110, 119Delay Alarm Reporting Time ................................... 217Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete ................ 154Delete

RF Zones ............................................................... 64Detectors ................................................................. 259Dialler ..................................................................... 259Dialler Information

Answering Machine Bypass ................................. 148Call Back Telephone Number............................... 147Dialling Format.................................................... 145Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 ........................... 140Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 ........................... 143Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 .......... 139Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 .......... 142Programing Telephone Numbers .......................... 138Ring Count .......................................................... 148Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 ...... 139Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 ...... 142Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 .................. 141Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 .................. 144Telco Arming Sequence ....................................... 146Telco Disarming Sequence ................................... 147Telephone Line Fault Options .............................. 149Transmission Format For Receiver 1 .................... 141Transmission Format For Receiver 2 .................... 144

Dialler Options 1

Allow Dialler Reporting Functions ....................... 153Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed... 153Disable Dialler Reporting Functions ..................... 153Remote Arming Via Telephone ............................ 153

Dialler Options 2Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete ............ 154Extend Time To Wait For Handshake ................... 154Open/Close Reports In STAY Mode ..................... 154Open/Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm Has

Occurred .......................................................... 154Dialler Options 3

Change Decadic Dialling To 60/40 ....................... 155Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit/Second ....... 155

Dialler Reporting Formats ........................................ 130Dialling Format........................................................ 145Disable Factory Default............................................ 118Disarmed ................................................................. 259Disarming

Automatic ............................................................ 221Both Areas At Same Time ................................ 76, 92From AWAY Mode................................................ 41From STAY Mode 1............................................... 44From STAY Mode 2............................................... 46Single Button Operation ....................................... 232

Domestic DiallingAcknowledging Alarm Report .............................. 126Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers .......... 66, 81Command 965...................................................... 114Disable....................67, 69, 70, 72, 82, 84, 85, 87, 128Format ................................................................. 126Function............................................................... 126Setting Up & Programming .................................. 127

DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit/Sec ...................... 155Dual Reporting......................................................... 259Duress Alarm............................................................. 47

E

E2 Fault ..................................................................... 53EDM Smart Watch................................................... 227EDMSAT ........................................... 72, 202, 254, 259Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode .............42, 45, 217Entry Time............................................................... 259Entry Timer 1........................................................... 216Entry Timer 2........................................................... 216Entry Warning ......................................................... 259EOL Resistor Value ................................................. 166Erase Programming Key........................................... 113Event Memory Recall Mode................................. 75, 91Exit Installer's Programming Mode........................... 110Exit Time..........................................................217, 260External Equipment.................................................. 260

F

FaultAC Mains Failure................................................... 54Beeps ................................................................... 233

Fault Analysis ............................................................ 51Determine Fault Type............................................. 51

Fault Analysis ModeDetermine Type...................................................... 95Exit ........................................................................ 95

Fault Descriptions ...................................................... 53Communciation Fail ............................................... 54Date and Time........................................................ 53

Index 305


E2 Fault .................................................................53Fuse Fail ................................................................53Horn Speaker .........................................................53Low Battery ...........................................................53RF Low Battery......................................................53RF Receiver Fail ....................................................53Sensor Watch .........................................................54System Fault ..........................................................53Tamper Fail............................................................54Telephone Line Fail................................................53

FAULT Indicator ....................................29, 33, 37, 238Features

Solution 844...........................................................19Solution 862...........................................................20Solution 880...........................................................21

Fire Alarm .................................................................47Forced Arming................................ 40, 43, 45, 179, 260Fuse Fail ....................................................................53

G

Glossary Of Terms ................................................... 259

H

Hand Held Dialler Tester.......................................... 255Hand Held Programmer.................................... 105, 254Hand Held Radio Remote Control ............................ 260Hand Held Transmitters............................................ 254Handover ................................................................. 171

Delay.................................................................... 260Delay To Be Sequential ........................................ 229

HandshakeExtend Time To Wait ........................................... 154

Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 ............................... 140Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 ............................... 143Hold Down Function

Arm In AWAY Mode.............................................93Arm In STAY Mode 1............................................93Arm In STAY Mode 2............................................94Bell Test.................................................................94Codepad Buzzer Tone Change ................................97Fault Analysis Mode...............................................95Horn Speaker Test ..................................................94Initiate Modem Call................................................96Reset Latching Outputs...........................................96Send Test Report ....................................................97Strobe Test .............................................................94Turning Day Alarm On/Off.....................................95

Horn Speaker .............................................................53Monitor ................................................................ 227Test ........................................................................94

I

Installer Code........................................................... 158Installer Code Function

Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence......................68Changing Domestic Phone Numbers .......................66Event Memory Recall .............................................75Satellite Siren Service Mode ...................................72Set First Test Report ...............................................65Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones ............................ 71, 86Telephone Monitor Mode .......................................73Walk Test Mode .....................................................74

Installer's Programming Commands958 - Enable/Disable Zone Status ......................... 108

959 - Test Programming Key ................................109960 - Exit Installer's Programming Mode ..............110961 - Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default

.........................................................................110962 - Copy Panel Memory To Programming Key ..111963 - Copy From Programming Key To Panel.......112964 - Erase Programming Key ..............................113965 - Set Up Domestic Dialling ............................114966 - Automatic Stepping Of Locations.................115999 - Display Panel Type/Software Version Number

.........................................................................117Internal Crystal To Keep Time..................................230Introduction................................................................18Invalid Code..............................................195, 218, 228Isolate In STAY Mode 1...........................................179Isolating Allowed .....................................................179Isolating Zones ...........................................................48

Code To Isolate ......................................................50Standard Method ....................................................49

K

Keyswitch Zone .......................................................172Options.................................................................177

L

Latching OutputsResetting ................................................................96

Lockout Dialler ................................................ 175, 260Lockout Siren................................................... 175, 260Low Battery ....................................................... 53, 187

Report ..................................................................194Restore Report......................................................194

M

MAINS Indicator.....................................29, 32, 37, 238Master Code .............................................................260Master Code Function

Arm/Disarm Both Areas At Same Time ..................76Changing & Deleting Remote Radio Codes .............79Changing & Deleting User Codes............................77Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers.................81Event Memory Recall .............................................91Setting Date and Time ............................................89Turning Outputs ON/OFF.......................................87Walk Test Mode .....................................................90

Master Partitioned CodepadArea Display Indicators .................................. 36, 237Area On/Off Indicators ................................... 35, 237Audible Indicators .......................................... 37, 239AUX Indicator................................................ 36, 238FAULT Indicator............................................ 37, 238MAINS Indicator............................................ 37, 238PARTIAL Indicator........................................ 36, 237Zone Indicators............................................... 35, 236

Medical Alarm ...........................................................47Modem Call ...............................................................96Modem Module ........................................................124Monitoring Station ...................................................260

N

New Zealand Telepermit Notes.................................272Night Arm Station ............................................ 230, 255



O

OFF Indicator/Zone Sealed ........................................ 33ON Indicator/Zone In Alarm ...................................... 33Open/Close Reports ................................................. 189

In STAY Mode .................................................... 154Only If Previous Alarm Has Occurred .................. 154Reporting Options................................................ 189

Option Bits .............................................................. 107Optional Equipment

2 Channel Radio Interface .................................... 2542 Wire Smoke Detector Interface.......................... 256Alarm Link Software............................................ 254Cellular Diallers................................................... 255CP5 Eight Zone Area Addressable........................ 255CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad............................. 255CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad............................. 255CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad .......................... 255EDMSAT - Satellite Siren.................................... 254Hand Held Dialler Tester...................................... 255Hand Held Programmer........................................ 254Hand Held Transmitters - 304 Mhz....................... 254Night Arm Station................................................ 255Phone Controller .................................................. 255Programming Key ................................................ 254PS100 Power Supply Module ............................... 255Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface ............................ 256Solution Codepad Mimic Board............................ 256TF008 Plug Pack.................................................. 256

Output 1 .................................................................. 200Output 2 .................................................................. 200Output Event Type ................................................... 202

AC Fail ................................................................ 204AC Mains 60 Hz or 50 Hz .................................... 209Alarm When In AWAY Mode.............................. 206Alarm When In STAY Mode................................ 206Any Areas Armed ................................................ 209Any Areas Disarmed ............................................ 209Area 1 Codepad Data Terminal ............................ 210Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed ................................... 209Area 1 In Alarm ................................................... 209Area 1 Is Armed................................................... 209Area 1 Is Disarmed .............................................. 209Area 2 Codepad Data Terminal ............................ 210Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed ................................... 209Area 2 In Alarm ................................................... 209Area 2 Is Armed................................................... 209Area 2 Is Disarmed .............................................. 209Armed In AWAY Mode....................................... 202Armed In STAY Mode......................................... 202Auto Arm Pre-Alert Time..................................... 202Codepad Duress Alarm ........................................ 205Codepad Fire Alarm............................................. 205Codepad Medical Alarm....................................... 205Codepad Panic Alarm........................................... 205Codepad Tamper.................................................. 205Communications Failure ...................................... 208Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls

........................................................................ 208Day Alarm Enabled.............................................. 204Day Alarm Latching............................................. 204Day Alarm Resetting............................................ 203Dialler Active....................................................... 208Dialler Disabled ................................................... 208EDMSAT - Satellite Siren.................................... 202

Entry Warning...................................................... 203Entry Warning + Day Alarm Resetting ................. 203Exit Warning........................................................ 203Exit Warning + Entry Warning ............................. 203Exit Warning Finished.......................................... 203Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry

Warning ........................................................... 202Fire Alarm Latching ............................................. 206Fire Alarm Resetting ............................................ 206Fire Alarm Verification ........................................ 207Fuse Fail .............................................................. 204Global Chime....................................................... 208Horn Speaker ....................................................... 205Horn Speaker Monitor Fail ................................... 204Kiss-Off After Exit Time...................................... 203Kiss-Off Received ................................................ 204Low Battery ......................................................... 204Mimic System Fault ............................................. 206Mimic Zone 1....................................................... 208Mimic Zone 2....................................................... 208Mimic Zone 3....................................................... 208Mimic Zone 4....................................................... 208Mimic Zone 5....................................................... 208Mimic Zone 6....................................................... 208Mimic Zone 7....................................................... 208Mimic Zone 8....................................................... 208Radio Control Output 1 ........................................ 207Radio Control Output 1 - Not In AWAY Mode..... 207Radio Control Output 2 ........................................ 207Radio Control Output 2 - Not In AWAY Mode..... 208Remote Control 1 ................................................. 207Remote Control 2 ................................................. 207Remote Control 3 ................................................. 207Ring Detect .......................................................... 208Sensor Watch Alarm ............................................ 205Silent Alarm......................................................... 206Sirens Running..................................................... 206Speaker Beeps...................................................... 205Strobe Operating .................................................. 206System Armed...................................................... 202System Disarmed ................................................. 202Telephone Line Fail ............................................. 204Zone Not Sealed................................................... 208Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time.......................... 208

Output PolarityNormally Low, Going Open ................................. 212Normally Low, Latching Open ............................. 212Normally Low, One Shot Open............................. 212Normally Low, One Shot Open With Alarm ......... 212Normally Low, One Shot Open With Reset........... 212Normally Low, One Shot Open With Retrigger..... 212Normally Low, Pulsing Open ............................... 212Normally Open, Going Low ................................. 211Normally Open, Latching Low ............................. 212Normally Open, One Shot Low............................. 211Normally Open, One Shot Low With Alarm ......... 212Normally Open, One Shot Low With Reset........... 211Normally Open, One Shot Low With Retrigger..... 211Normally Open, Pulsing Low................................ 211Output Not Used .................................................. 211

Outputs .................................................................... 200One Shot Polarities............................................... 214Polarity ................................................................ 211Pulsing Polarities.................................................. 213

Index 307


Redirecting Output To Codepad Buzzer ................ 201Timing ................................................................. 213Turning On/Off ......................................................87

P

Panic........................................................................ 260Panic Alarm ...............................................................47PARTIAL Indicator............................................ 36, 237Partitioning

Area Addressable Codepad Operations ................. 240Codepad Connections ........................................... 247Codepad Operations ............................................. 240Master Partitioned Codepad Operations ................ 240Master Partitioned LED Codepad.......................... 236Programming........................................................ 241Setting Up Area 1 Codepad................................... 246Setting Up Area 2 Codepad................................... 246Setting Up Master Partitioned Codepad................. 246User Code Allocations.......................................... 245Zone Allocations .................................................. 243

Partitioning Options 1Display AUX Indicator When Using Telephone Line

......................................................................... 242First To Open/Last To Close Reporting................. 241Main Codepad To Display Data Only For Area 1 .. 241Resetting Of Sirens From Either Area ................... 242

Partitioning Options 2Enable "User Code + 0 + AWAY" To Arm/Disarm

Both Areas........................................................ 242Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 & Lock Area 2 To

Receiver 2 ........................................................ 242Phone Controller .............................................. 255, 260Plug Pack ................................................................. 256Point ID Codes......................................................... 131Power Up Disarmed ................................................. 230Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 .............. 139Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 .............. 142Programming ........................................................... 102

Automatic Stepping Of Locations ......................... 115Codepad Indicators............................................... 103Entry/Exit Tiemrs................................................. 216Installer's Programming Commands...................... 107Option Bits............................................107, 152, 226Telephone Numbers.............................................. 138Via Hand Held Programmer.................................. 105Via Programming Key .......................................... 106Via Remote Codepad............................................ 103

Programming Key ............................................ 106, 254Copy From Programming Key To Panel ............... 112Copy Panel Memory To Programming Key........... 111Erase .................................................................... 113Test ...................................................................... 109

Programming SheetsSolution 404......................................................... 273Solution 406......................................................... 283Solution 408......................................................... 293

PS100 Power Supply Module ................................... 255

Q

Quick Start.................................................................22

R

Radio Input Options ................................................. 234Latching Keyswitch Input..................................... 234

Momentary Keyswitch Input.................................234Radio Receiver .....................................................234

Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface......................... 230, 256Radio User Codes

Transmitter Operations ...........................................56Receiver 1

Handshake Tone ...................................................140Primary Telephone Number ..................................139Secondary Telephone Number ..............................139Subscriber ID Number ..........................................141Transmission Format ............................................141

Receiver 2Handshake Tone ...................................................143Primary Telephone Number ..................................142Secondary Telephone Number ..............................142Subscriber ID Number ..........................................144Transmission Format ............................................144

Relay Output ............................................................200Remote Arming Via Telephone......................... 100, 153Remote Radio Transmitter Operations ........................56

Add or Changing Transmitter Codes ................. 58, 79Deleting Transmitter Codes............................... 59, 80Horn Speaker Beeps................................................57Strobe Indications...................................................57

Remote Radio User CodesAdding Or Changing......................................... 58, 79Deleting............................................................ 59, 80

Reporting Format4 + 2 Reporting Format.........................................133Basic Pager...........................................................134Contact ID Format................................................130Domestic Dialling.................................................126

Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default ...........110RF

Device Mapping (1 - 8).........................................250Device Mapping (9 - 16).......................................250Device Signal Strength (1 - 8) ...............................251Dialler Reporting Options .....................................188Jamming Monitoring ............................................250Low Battery..........................................................187Receiver Trouble Report .......................................188Receiver Trouble Restore Report ..........................188Sound Siren On RF Receiver Fail..........................250Sound Siren On RF Receiver Tamper/Jamming.....250Supervision Time..................................................187Unseal Zone That Fails Supervision ......................250

RF Low Battery..........................................................53RF Receiver Fail ........................................................53RF Transmitter Operations..........................................56RF Zones

Add ........................................................................63Delete.....................................................................64

Ring Count...............................................................148

S

Satellite Siren ................................................... 254, 259Satellite Siren Service Mode .......................................72Sealed ......................................................................260Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1...........139Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2...........142Sensor Watch ..............................................54, 176, 260

Reports.................................................................186Time.....................................................................218

Silent Alarm..................................................... 176, 260



Siren & Strobe In STAY Mode ................................ 233Siren Run Time........................................................ 219Siren Sound Rate ..................................................... 219Smart Watch............................................................ 227Software Version Number........................................ 271Solution Codepad Mimic Board ............................... 256Specifications..................................................269, 271STAY Indicator ....................................................29, 32STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status ......... 231STAY Mode 1 ......................................................... 261

Arming .............................................................42, 93Disarming .............................................................. 44

STAY Mode 2 ......................................................... 261Arming .............................................................45, 94Disarming .............................................................. 46Setting Zones ....................................................71, 86

StrobeIndications For Radio Arm/Disarm....................... 227

Strobe Output .......................................................... 200Strobe Test................................................................. 94Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1...................... 141Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2...................... 144Supervision Time..................................................... 187Swinger Shutdown Count

For Dialler ........................................................... 182For Siren.............................................................. 181

System Date............................................................. 223System Disarmed Indicator ........................................ 32System Operations ..................................................... 40

Arming In AWAY Mode........................................ 40Arming In STAY Mode 1....................................... 42Arming In STAY Mode 2....................................... 45Disarming From AWAY Mode .............................. 41Disarming From STAY Mode 1 ............................. 44Disarming From STAY Mode 2 ............................. 46

System Options 1..................................................... 227Assign Button 4 On Transmitter To Arm STAY Mode

1 ...................................................................... 227EDM Smart Lockout ............................................ 227Monitoring Of Horn Speaker................................ 227Strobe Indications For Radio Arm/Disarm............ 227

System Options 2..................................................... 228Access Denied To Be Silent ................................. 228Codepad Fire To Be Silent ................................... 228Codepad Medical To Be Silent ............................. 228Codepad Panic To Be Silent ................................. 228

System Options 3..................................................... 229AC Fail In 1 Hour ................................................ 229Handover Delay To Be Sequential........................ 229Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication .......................... 229Zone Pulse Count Handover ................................. 229

System Options 4..................................................... 230Arm/Disarm Tracking On Power Up..................... 230Enable Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed....... 230Enable Radio Key/Keyswitch Interface or Night Arm

Station.............................................................. 230Internal Crystal To Keep Time ............................. 230

System StatusAC Mains Fail Report .......................................... 193AC Mains Fail Restore Report.............................. 193Access Denied ..................................................... 195Fuse Fail Report................................................... 192Fuse Fail Restore Report ...................................... 192Low Battery Report.............................................. 194

Low Battery Restore Report ................................. 194Reporting Options ................................................ 196

System Time............................................................ 222

T

Tamper Fail ............................................................... 54Telco Arming Sequence ..................................... 68, 146Telco Disarming Sequence ....................................... 147Telecom Connection Diagrams................................. 264Telephone Anti-Jamming ......................................... 266Telephone Arming ............................................100, 153Telephone Line Fail ................................................... 53Telephone Line Fault Options .................................. 149Telephone Monitor Mode ........................................... 73Telephone Numbers

Changing Domestic Phone Numbers....................... 66Terminal Definitions and Descriptions...................... 258Test Reports............................................................... 97

After Siren Reset .................................................. 231Dialler Options..................................................... 197Only When Armed ........................................231, 267Repeat Interval ..................................................... 197Reporting Time .................................................... 197Set First Test Report............................................... 65

TF008 Plug Pack...................................................... 256Transmission Format For Receiver 1 ........................ 141Transmission Format For Receiver 2 ........................ 144Transmitter Operations............................................... 56Trouble Reports ....................................................... 185

U

Unsealed .................................................................. 261User Code Function

Arm/Disarm Both Areas At Same Time.................. 92User Codes........................................................159, 261

Adding Or Changing ........................................ 77, 79Allocations When Partitioning.............................. 245Deleting ........................................................... 78, 80Priority Level ....................................................... 161

W

Walk Test Mode................................................... 74, 90Warranty Statement.................................................. 270Wireless Zones

Add........................................................................ 63Delete .................................................................... 64

Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 262

Z

ZoneAllocations........................................................... 243Defaults ......................................................... 24, 170Dialler Options..............................................169, 180EOL Resistor Value.............................................. 166Indicators ............................................ 28, 31, 35, 236Isolating - Code To Isolate...................................... 50Isolating - Standard ................................................ 49Isolating Allowed ................................................. 179Operating Information .......................................... 169Options 1 ......................................................169, 175Options 2 ............................................................. 169Programming ....................................................... 169Pulse Count...................................................169, 173Pulse Count Handover ...................................173, 229

Index 309


Pulse Count Time ......................................... 169, 174Report Code ......................................................... 169Reporting Information .................................. 169, 180Restore Code ........................................................ 186Restore Report...................................................... 179Status Mode ......................................................... 108Trouble................................................................. 185Types ......................................................25, 169, 171

Zone Bypass............................................................. 185Zone Options 1

Delay Alarm Reporting......................................... 175Lockout Siren & Dialler ....................................... 175Sensor Watch ....................................................... 176Silent Alarm......................................................... 176

Zone Options 2Forced Arming ..................................................... 179Isolate In STAY Mode 1....................................... 179Zone Isolation Allowed......................................... 179Zone Restore Report............................................. 179

Zone Reporting InformationDialler Options..................................................... 180Zone Report Code ................................................ 180Zone Restore Code ............................................... 186

Zone StatusBypass Reports.....................................................185Reporting Options ................................................186Sensor Watch Reports...........................................186Tamper Reports ....................................................184Trouble Reports....................................................185Walk Test Reports ................................................184

Zone Types24 Hour Burglary Zone .........................................17224 Hour Fire Zone ................................................17224 Hour Hold-Up Zone .........................................17224 Hour Medical...................................................17224 Hour Panic Zone ..............................................17224 Hour Tamper ...................................................172Chime Zone..........................................................173Delay-1 Zone........................................................171Delay-2 Zone........................................................171Handover Zone .....................................................171Instant Zone..........................................................171Keyswitch Zone....................................................172Zone Not Used......................................................173

Zones .......................................................................261



Index 311


Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Installation Manual Ultima 862-880... · This page has been included...

Documents

Transcript of Solution Ultima 844/862/880 Installation Manual Ultima 862-880... · This page has been included...